Home

Novell SUSE LINUX Professional 9.3

1. 96 99 eU Pa M Robur uu iut E 100 bil Contents a e GR uem ae RO UR Ron p RE e 100 5 1 2 TheSearchFunction llle 101 D2 Man Pagesa root bee doe bees babe ee ad eh ge d 102 5 9 Info Pages sees cones ata pen ert is a been pde Ba d once d 103 54 The Linux Documentation Project o o oo ooo 104 Contents b4l HOWTOS i e RR RR ERE EER ROR SS 104 542 Frequently Asked Questions 04 105 55 Wikipedia the Free Online Encyclopedia 105 5 6 Guides and Booker 105 561 SUSE Books 05022 ee eee 105 5 62 Other Manuals 105 AAA A 106 II Office 107 109 dee eaten 110 6 2 Word Processing with Writer o o o ooo o 111 6 2 1 Selecting Text ss dom im corras eee bad m Rh 112 6 2 2 Navigating in Large Documents 113 6 23 Formatting with Styles o o o 113 63 Introducing Calc 6 llle 115 64 Introducing Impress eee 115 65 lntrodudbingBase es i soore t ratia ea e e ee a E E e 115 6 6__ For More Information a aaa a 115 n7 118 7 2___Evolution Overview 0 0 000 000 ee ee 118 7 2 1 Mall io oe eom Mice he eo Sub ded eec e 6 odes 118 22 Contacts 64 23 ee Ws be ee a PO S UAM S 119 72 9 Calendai cris 864 2 Rae Ras ee RET 119 V24 EE one oe eo oe Roy kee eb Ges 120 Z3 Mail eas ve he eR RSS REE BED E us eee Re UE 120 73 1 Configuring Acc
2. 0 cece eee eee 246 STUINCHONS alicia 249 iur EE 252 Wild cards 0 cece cece eee aan 251 browsers 2 2 ec eee eee ee see Web browsers Dor e M Q E77 C calendars Evolution sssssss 11911125 Kontact SROPYING acotar aid sele creating 2091213 audio 212 Erica sewer NEE Saag ISO images players even eege haan dome Sas EE PIPPIN iii S ee Ren GREIP Index SEEP eer ge SE configuration files etc fstab ooooooommoo etc sysconfig sysctl Do CLASES ferias ta D date a a 266 desktops iri e Ree PeHbni EE configuring cece eee GNOME 00 cece eee E EE switching users 000 eee GE 265 IR digital cameras suus ACCESSING Set Eege d re connecting 1 6 Kerita ee eee eee Digikam sese BEAM aiiis eer enia wenn as Konqueror 0 0 cence eens PTP protocol directories changing 066 ce cece eee ee ase creating ine eee eee eee eee deleting 66 cece eee iena navigating 6 cece eee eee PAS gege V Er Rd SR download managers gt Firefox quem 160 KGET AE ee P QU uade drives mounting 265 unmounting 6 6 eee eee eee 265 e mail applications Evolution 0 005 1170127 Kontact 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 12911140 editors encryption Evolution 1121 et
3. Welcome to K3b 0 11 20cvs The CD DVD Burning Facility r3 Y Le New Audio CD Project New Data CD Project ke o 2 ovo s New Data DVD Project Copy CD 3 Temp 6 0 GB 9 9 GB K3b 0 11 20cvs Figure 15 1 Creating a New Data CD Then select Burn from the toolbar A dialog with five tabs offering various op tions for writing the CD opens See Figure on the next page The Writing tab has various settings for the burning device the speed and the burning options The detected writer is displayed under Burning Device in the burning dialog Set the burning speed in Speed The following options are of fered here Writing Mode This option determines how the laser writes a CD In DAO disk at once mode the laser is not deactivated while the CD is written This mode is recommended for the creation of audio CDs However it is not supported by all CD writers In the TAO mode track at one a separate 15 1 Creating a Data CD Data Project size 547 3 MB X ai Writing Settings Volume Desc Eilesystem Advanced Burning Device y Speed O X Cancel Writing Mode r Auto 2 Options Simulate X On the fly Burnfree C Only create image C Verify written data K3b Defaults User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 15 2 Customizing the Burning Process write process is used for each individual track The RAW m
4. PE Q Close Figure 12 3 Search Screen for Importing a Key If your search on the key server is successful a list of all retrieved server entries is displayed in a new window Select the key to include in your key ring and click Import See Figure on the next page Confirm the following message with 170 12 4 The Key Server Dialog OK then exit the key server dialog with Close The imported key then appears in the main overview of the key manager and is ready for use Found 42 matching keys n Keys y amp test lt test example com gt Test two no pp lt two e amp TheLugash lt none exam amp Thomas TankEngine tho fog Tux Pinguin lt tux exampl amp Usenet Poster Usenet Se 4 amp vhs m testuser 10 pgp t v Key to import 46E1E549 we Import Close 19 Figure 12 4 Hits and Import 12 4 2 Exporting Your Keys to a Key Server To export your key to one of the freely accessible key servers on the Internet se lect the Export tab in the key server dialog Designate the target server and the key to export by means of two drop down menus Then start the export with Ex port 12 5 Text and File Encryption KGpg also offers the possibility to encrypt text or clipboard contents Click the padlock icon and find the options Encrypt clipboard and Decrypt clipboard as well as the option for opening the integrate
5. directories dictate tidied Save ees file systems 00 0 0c eee E accra jr EE 267 power management PINNE ainia sac ken ker and danni goes Firefox ae SN SEN REN ENEE EEN 1164 processes ciis era ri hrs SET ebe OVerview dEr cece cece eee EPES profile management 000005 programs see applications see commands SII deco ud v Cr PUDE EN I DNA ERA 266 PIR protocol EE 216 Q qaRecord ged Reeder xe meti een eas 195 R A inei A E a 268 e E 261 ont 262 S scanning character recognition 232 SGOCR bereede gu 44 E e EEPI ESI 2274232 screenshots KSnapshot serso iere rh dees 189 TEEN Hei shells cem rr d ENEE HERR 245 Bash gie ae deele 246 commands ssssssn 26011268 paths ita clas 250 le 252 wild cards ssssssess 1251 sound chips EE 181 envy24 EELEE ETT 181 on board sssssssssse 80 Soundblaster Live 181 data compression AGHP ee esnias dork hr eee KAudioCreator Konqueror 00 c eee eee Ogg Vorbis Oggenc 2 eee eee eee ee eee editing files ooooooooooomoo SAMIKETS us ees dr a e anda n A alsamixet ceret ky ever serere envy24control GNOME me ey rere ex ens O sert eie aesti Parar AMATO circa 182 CNOME 188 KSGQID Valles 188 AMM Sois rotas 186 recording o EE 195 audacia 192 qaRecord ssussuuuuss
6. Adjust the amplification for the analog to digital and digital to analog converters under Analog Volume Use the DAC sliders for the output channels and the ADC sliders for the input channels The S PDIF channel settings are made under Hardware Settings The Envy24 chip reacts to volume changes with a delay that can be configured with Volume Change 13 2 Multimedia Players 13 2 1 amaroK The amaroK media player handles various audio formats and plays the stream ing audio broadcasts of radio stations on the Internet The program handles all 13 2 Multimedia Players file types supported by the sound server acting as a back end currently aRts or GStreamer On first start amaroK launches a First Run Wizard which helps set up amaroK In the first step configure your preferred look and feel for amaroK Choose to display player and playlist in separate windows see Figure 13 4Jon the current page or combine their functionality in one single window In the second step determine where amaroK should look for your music collection amaroK scans these folders for playable media By default amaroK is configured to scan the se lected folders recursively to include all their subdirectories in the scan monitor changes to the content of the selected directories and import any playlists located there All the settings made with the wizard can be modified later by starting the wizard again with Tools
7. If you need more features try gThumb With this application you can organize and sort your photographs 16 5 Using gtKam 16 6 Using Digikam Digikam by Renchi Raju is a KDE program for downloading photographs from digital cameras The first time itis run Digikam asks where to store your photo album If you enter a directory that already contains a collection of photographs Digikam treats each subfolder of the folder as an Album On start up Digikam presents a window with two sections your albums are dis played to the left and the respective photographs available are displayed to the right See Figure 16 1 on the current page Album Tag Image Select View Tools Camera Settings Help 18398 5 E e ZARB NZ 2004 February 2005 275 Items Y 4 My Albums 148 E 2004 December 24 PO 2005 February 24 7 2004 11 22 11 50 2004 11 22 11 51 2004 11 22 11 51 2004 11 22 11 51 a Figure 16 1 The Main Window of Digikam 16 6 1 Configuring Your Camera To set up a camera in Digikam select Camera Add Camera First try to au todetect the camera with Auto Detect If this fails browse the list for your model with Add If your camera model is not included in the list try an older model or use USB Mass Storage or USB PTP Class Camera Normally this should work Confirm with Ok SUSE LINUX xnur pub soraw orpq 219 220 16 6 2 Downloading Pict
8. Office Personal Information Man ager Alternatively enter kontact amp in a command line For only part of the functionality it is possible to open the individual components instead of the com bined application 8 1 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs To import e mail from other applications select Tools gt Import messages from the mail view in Kontact It currently features import filters for Outlook Express the mbox format e mail text format Pegasus Mail and Evolution The import utility can also be started separately with the command kmailcvt Select the corresponding application and confirm with Continue A file ora folder must be provided depending on the selected type Kontact then completes the process 8 2 Kontact Overview The default window view which shows the Summary is shown in Figure 8 1 on the next page Use the buttons in the left section to access the different compo nents The Summary provides some basic information about upcoming birthdays and to dos weather and the status of KPilot The news section can access RSS feeds to provide updated news of interest to you Use Settings gt Configure Sum mary View to configure the information displayed 8 2 1 Mail The folder area to the left contains a list of your mail folders mail boxes indi cating the total number of messages and how many are still unread To select a folder simply click
9. 126 7 7 For More Information 127 WUDIBOld Jopue o2 PUD ID JA 3 UY uoun o 3 M 118 Start Evolution from the main menu or with evolution When started for the first time Evolution offers a configuration assistant Its use is described in Section on page 120 Important Microsoft Exchange Accounts Using Evolution with Microsoft Exchange requires installation of the ximian connector package Install it with YaST Important zi 7 1 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs Evolution can import e mail from other e mail programs such as Netscape To do so select File gt Import For mbox formats select Import a single file For Netscape select Import data and settings from older programs To work with data from programs using the maildir format such as KMail configure an ac count that accesses the mail directory 7 2 Evolution Overview The default window view is shown in Figurel7 IJon the facing page The avail able menus menu items and the icons in the toolbar vary depending on the com ponent open Use the left frame to select the information to display in the right frame Adjust the size of the frames by dragging the dividing bars 7 2 1 Mail In this view the upper half of the window shows the contents of the current folder The lower half is a preview pane used to display the selected mail mes sage To change the folder displayed select one from the folder l
10. PNR 14 null ARD Ges em DVB channels 3 ease Semen pem Elle Commands Database Help wg de S EEN Be e gt Ee S Name m Gees 2 570000000 Video Audio Teletext MDR FERNSEH Ml gt Hannover 3 658000000 101 102 104 B d ow 8o GO E ME ASH eR E 2 m Auc Endo rbb Berlin ARD 258 12 1 1201 1202 1204 rbb Brandenburg ARD 258 11 1 1101 1102 1104 ARMUT D TE Frontend locked bit errors 0 258 Figure 14 3 Running xawtv4 Right click the start window to open the control window see Figure on the current page Start a scan for available DVB stations with Edit Scan DVB A channel scanner and browser window open Select a bouquet to prepare the scan SUSE LINUX UuULbIASM PUD OlDpDe O9plA AL 203 This can be done manually with Commands Tune manually if you already know the tuning parameters of the bouquet or by requesting them from a built in database of xawtv4 via Database gt country channel number replace country and channel number by the actual values for your location As soon as the scanner is tuned in the first data is displayed in the browser win dow Launch a full scan of all available stations with Command gt Full Scan While the scanner is running you can select your favorite stations and add them to the station list by simply dragging them into the control window Leave the channel scanner and select one of the channels to
11. Properties set the paper size specify the print command choose grayscale or color and determine the margins When satisfied with your settings approve with Print 11 7 For More Information Get more information about Firefox from the official home page at http www mozilla org products firefox Refer to the integrated help to find out more about certain options or features 11 6 Printing from Firefox Encryption with KGpg KGpg is an important component of the encryption infrastructure on your sys tem With the help of this program generate and manage all needed keys use its editor function for the quick creation and encryption of files or use the applet in your panel to encrypt or decrypt by dragging and dropping Other programs such as your mail program Kontact or Evolution access the key data to process signed or encrypted contents This chapter covers the basic functions needed for daily work with encrypted files beneath othe hea ee 166 122 Exporting the Public Kei 166 123 Importing Keys s e saoo sadora ooo 168 124 The Key Server Dialog 170 125 Text and File Encryption o 171 12 6 For More Informati0M l 173 6d2 UM UOLOAJOUY 166 12 1 Generating a New Key Pair To be able to exchange encrypted messages with other users first generate your own key pair One part of it the public key is distributed to your communica
12. SUSE LINUX USER GUIDE Edition 2005 Copyright O This publication is intellectual property of Novell Inc Its contents can be duplicated either in part or in whole provided that a copyright label is visibly located on each copy All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to detail However this does not guarantee complete accuracy Neither SuSE Linux GmbH the authors nor the translators shall be held liable for possible errors or the consequences thereof Many of the software and hardware descriptions cited in this book are registered trade marks All trade names are subject to copyright restrictions and may be registered trade marks SUSE LINUX GmbH essentially adheres to the manufacturer s spelling Names of products and trademarks appearing in this book with or without specific notation are likewise subject to trademark and trade protection laws and may thus fall under copyright restrictions Please direct suggestions and comments to documentation suse de Authors J rg Bartsch Marcel Hilzinger Takashi Iwai Stephan Kulow Johannes Meixner Matthias Nagorny Siegfried Olschner Marcus Sch fer Jens Daniel Schmidt Arvin Schnell Adrian Schr ter Luis Villa Editors J rg Arndt Antje Faber Berthold Gunreben Roland Haidl Jana Jaeger Edith Parzefall In s Pozo Thomas R lz Thomas Schraitle Rebecca Wal ter Layout Manuela Piotrowski Thomas Schraitle Setting DocBook XML DIN
13. This is only useful for laptops Laptop Battery monitors your batteries Power management software must be installed 4 2 8 Regional amp Accessibility Accessibility configures functions that can help individuals with difficulties in motor function or vision In Country Region amp Language set your locale settings You can add more than one language Numbers money time and dates can be customized in the respec tive tabs Keyboard layout allows use of multiple layouts for different languages For ex ample you can activate a French and a German layout and switch between them Enable this with Enable keyboard layouts select the one or more layouts from the list and press Add Fine tune them in the Xkb Options tab Keyboard Shortcuts deals with key bindings A key binding is an association between an action for example delete and one or more keys 4 2 Settings 4 2 9 Security amp Privacy To make KDE more secure Crypto allows you to configure SSL secure socket layer This is used in most KDE applications as well as others There is also a possibility to manage your personal certificates The KDE password manager can be customized in the module KDE Wallet Apart from some general settings you can create a new wallet This enables you to have different wallets for example for different actions To change your personal settings go to Password amp User Account Here se
14. Track at once mode inserts an intermission of two seconds after each track 15 2 Creating an Audio CD Preserving Data Integrity When burning audio CDs choose a lower burning speed to reduce the risk of burning errors Tip 15 3 Copying a CD Select Tools gt CD gt Copy CD or the copy CD button from the toolbar In the dialog that opens make the settings for the reading and writing device as shown in Figure on the following page The writing options discussed are also avail able here An additional function enables the creation of several copies of the CD Check On the fly to burn the CD as soon as it has been read or select Only cre ate image to create an image in the path specified in Temp Directory gt Write image file to and burn the image later 15 4 Writing ISO Images If you already have an ISO image go to Tools gt CD gt Burn CD image A window opens in which to enter the location of the Image to Burn K3b calcu lates a check sum and displays it in MD5 Sum If the ISO file was downloaded from the Internet this sum shows if the download was successful Use the Options and Advanced tabs to set your preferences To burn the CD click Start 15 5 For More Information Apart from the two main functions described above K3b offers other functions such as the creation of DVD copies reading audio data in WAV forma
15. and Up buttons as you would do in a Web browser The functionalities and config uration options described below Section 3 3 2Jon the following page and Section 3 3 4lon pagel60 also apply to the file browser interface pag Pply SUSE LINUX 97 58 File Edit View Places Help e Je la y bin Documents public html wilber v 3 items Free space 6 4 GB Figure 3 2 Nautilus Standard Window To navigate between folders use the drop down menu at bottom left edge of the Nautilus window Here find all parent folders to the current directory up to the file system root Select the desired folder and it opened in a new Nautilus win dow on top of the old one Alternatively open just the immediate parent of the current folder by choosing File gt Open Parent If you want to close these par ent folders select File gt Close Parent Folders 3 3 2 File Management Nautilus supports drag and drop for file management Any file from the desktop can simply be dragged onto an open Nautilus window and dropped to its final destination To move files between directories open the source directory contain ing the file to move Select File Open Location enter the path to the target directory then drag the files to move to the Nautilus window holding the target directory Files and folders can be moved to and from an open Nautilus window and the desktop If you need to create multiple copi
16. to open the file dialog of the text editor 6 Hit Compose to enter the filename via the virtual keyboard and hit Re turn on the virtual keyboard 7 To terminate the text editor return to the main menu and select Menus File gt Quit To configure the behavior of GOK click GOK gt Preferences in the main win dow and adjust the Appearance Actions Feedback Access Methods and Prediction settings More information about GOK can be obtained at http www gok ca where you also find a comprehensive online help for this tool 3 5 2 Gnopernicus Gnopernicus is a powerful tool collection with various types of screen reading applications for blind and visually impaired users It provides the following func tionalities Speech A speech synthesizer software is used to translate the actions on screen to spoken words If your computer has a sound card you can configure Gnopernicus to comment anything that happens on screen Braille and Braille monitor If a braille device is connected to your system Gnopernicus can translate the screen directly to this device If you activated Braille Monitor as well get an on screen display of the braille output This option might prove useful for demonstration purposes Magnifier This module assists visually impaired users by magnifying the screen using a customizable zoom factor Once Gnopernicus has been started its
17. usr share doc howto en Read these files with a command like less usr share doc howto en DOS to Linux HOWTO txt gz Terminate the command by pressing 272 Hardware Is my hardware supported It is best to refer to the component database at http cdb suse de index php LANG en_EN or http cdb suse de less usr share doc howto en Hardware HOWTO gz can also provide some information Also check the hardware section of the SUSE LINUX FAQ at http www novell com products linuxprofessional fag index html Installation Where do I find the current system requirements for an installation of SUSE LINUX Refer to http www novell com products linuxprofessional sysreqs html for the system requirements of the most recent SUSE LINUX distribution How much disk space do I need for Linux This depends on how many and which packages you want to install A standard installation with office applications requires about 2 GB 2 5 GB is recommended if you want space for your own data as well To install just about everything you need 3 6 GB depending on the version What is meant by partitioning Partitioning is dividing the hard disk into smaller sections For the default configuration SUSE LINUX requires at least two partitions one for Linux itself and one swap partition for the vir tual main memory Which file system do you recommend The file system best suited for you highly depends on the scenario in which your system wil
18. 17 3 The Menus Some of the functions of the toolbar are also available in the File and Image menus Modify preference settings for Kooka in Settings File Use this menu to start the KPrinter printing assistant create a new folder for your images and save delete and close files The OCR results of a scanned text document can be saved here Also use this menu to close Kooka Image The Image menu allows starting a graphics application for postprocess ing or optical character recognition of an image The recognized text from an OCR operation is displayed in its own frame Various tools for scaling rotating and flipping an image are available These functions can also be accessed from the toolbar Create From Selection allows saving an area of an image previously marked with the mouse Settings Settings adjusts of the look and feel of Kooka The toolbar and status bar can be switched on and off and keyboard shortcuts for menu entries can be defined Configure Toolbars provides a list of all the functions avail able to the toolbar Configure Kooka opens a configuration dialog in which to modify the look and feel of Kooka Normally however the defaults are sufficient In Tool Views enable and disable the thumbnail viewer the pre view the gallery the scanning parameters and the OCR result window Help The Help menu provides access to the online help manual for Kooka Also use it to acce
19. Advanced Options and Additional Tags See Figure I 5 on the following page The first tab Files determines the file or files to print Either drag them from the desktop and drop them into the list window or use the file dialog to locate them Copies determines the page selection all pages of the selected document the currently selected one or a range and the number of copies You may also choose to print only the even or only the odd numbered pages of the selected document Use Advanced Options to specify any additional information for the print job Enter any Billing information if needed or set a custom page label at the top and bottom of the page The Job Priority can also be set here The fourth tab Additional Tags is hardly ever needed Once your print job has been filed you can watch its progress using KJobViewer Tip Printing from KDE Applications The KPrinter dialog opens any time you print from a KDE application The dialog is basically the same except for the lack of the Files tab which is not needed because the file to print has already been deter mined when you clicked the Print button Tip SUSE LINUX 904002 Jeu 19 20 Printer Name T f Properties State Idle accepting jobs Type Lexmark Optra S 2455 Postscript Location 3 1 17 Comment Lexmark Optra S 2455 PS on print suse de Eiles Copies Advanced Options Additional T
20. After clicking Next again see a summary The final Next opens the KDE Printer dialog Here decide if you want to see a preview save as PDF or just print directly 16 6 Using Digikam Create Template for Calendar HS Preview Settings Create Calendar Paper size A4 v m Image Position e Top Left Right POBRUDRY Draw lines in calendar mE TE WM TW m nm an oc 2 9 94 8 Image to text ratio o s nn se Uu sr v w m Font Y2KBUG SA sn e e ge a e e Help y 3 Cancel Figure 16 3 Creating a Template for a Calendar Finding Duplicate Photographs Sometimes you photograph similar scenes repeatedly and want to keep only the best shots This is the perfect task for the Find Duplicate plug in Go to Tools gt Find Duplicate Images which opens a window similar to Fig ure 16 4 on the next page Select the albums or tags to handle Under Method amp Cache choose the search method a more accurate or a faster method After you confirm with Ok Digikam proceeds with the investigation If it finds some duplicates it shows the result in a window like Figure on page Decide which images to delete by activating the desired check boxes then clicking Delete Leave the window with Close SUSE LINUX xnu PUD SOIOLUDD JOLIBIG 223 Album s Selection Selection O 2004 December 24 Select All c O Tag Events Invert Sele
21. Change permissions in Permissions Meta Info lists line word and a character count and the format of the new file g Apply your changes and leave the dialog with OK Q 3 Add a new device icon a Right click the desktop to open the context menu o b Select Create New gt Link to Device c Choose the appropriate device type to open the Properties dialog d The Properties dialog consists of four tabs General Permissions Device and Meta Info Set the name and icon of the device in the General tab Modify permissions in Permissions Device is used to set the device path such as media dvd for your DVD drive and several other options e Apply your changes and leave the dialog with OK 1 3 3 Little Helpers Both GNOME and KDE come with numerous little helper applications that can be included in your panel If you want to add new ones or remove existing ones proceed as described in Section 1 3 2Jon page 10 The most prominent ones fea tured in both GNOME and KDE are SUSEWatcher and SUSE Hardware Tool SuSEWatcher SUSEWatcher is a program that is integrated into the system tray of the panel It checks for new software updates To be able to find any new updates it requires an online connection The status of SUSEWatcher is dis played in the panel by icons in different colors When you click the icon in the panel a window ope
22. It also allows you to manage the tabbed subwindows within the main window by opening or closing a tab duplicating an exist ing tab or detaching a tab into a separate window Help Under the Help menu access the Konqueror handbook or the What s This function Normally this function can also be accessed with the ques SUSE LINUX doptiseq 3q eut 82 tion mark symbol at the top right in the title bar The mouse pointer is then displayed with a question mark If you click an icon a brief help text is dis played if available The Help menu also provides a short introduction to Konqueror and the possibility to report bugs and other concerns to the de velopers About Konqueror and About KDE provide information about the version license authors and translators of the project 4 3 4 The Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to frequently used functions that can also be accessed via the menu If you let the mouse pointer rest above an icon a short de scription is displayed Right click a free space in the toolbar to open a menu with which to change the position of the toolbar switch from icons to text change the icon size and display or hide the individual bars Start the configuration dialog with Configure Toolbars To the right the toolbar features the Konqueror icon which is animated while a directory or Web page is loaded 4 3 5 The Location Bar The location bar is preceded by a black
23. The Key Manager sending it by e mail click this option confirm or change the file path and name and click OK Trust Expiration Unlimited Unlimited 12 3 Importing Keys If you receive a key in a file for example as an e mail attachment integrate it in your key ring with Import Key and use it for encrypted communication with the sender The procedure is similar to the procedure for exporting keys already described 12 3 1 Signing Keys Keys can be signed like every other file to guarantee their authenticity and in tegrity If you are absolutely sure an imported key belongs to the individual spec ified as the owner express your trust in the authenticity of the key with your sig nature 12 3 Importing Keys Wr Size 1024 Creation Id 2005 02 28 0x76FED000 2005 02 28 0x59847CF5 1 Keys 0 Groups M Important Establishing a Web of Trust Encrypted communication is only secure to the extent that you can positively associate public keys in circulation with the specified user By cross checking and signing these keys you contribute to the estab lishment of a web of trust Important Select the key to sign in the key list Select Keys gt Sign Keys In the following dialog designate the private key to use for the signature An alert reminds you to check the authenticity of this key before signing it If you have performed this check click Continue and enter
24. The administrator root can use the com mand to change the password of any user on the system su option s username The su command makes it possible to log in under a different username from a running session Specify a username and the corresponding password to use the environment of the respective user The password is not required from root because root is authorized to as sume the identity of any user When using the command without specifying a username you are prompted for the root password and change to the superuser root halt option s To avoid loss of data you should always use this program to shut down your system reboot option s Does the same as halt except the system performs an immediate reboot clear This command cleans up the visible area of the console It has no options 19 4 The vi Editor Operating the vi editor takes some practice For many it is the preferred editor partly because it is available on any UNIX like operating system and is included in default Linux installations Also if nothing else works vi will The short in structions that follow should enable you to edit various configuration files and other types of files with vi vi provides three operating modes In command mode keys are interpreted as command elements Insert mode interprets all keys as text entries Last line mode is used for more complex commands which are entered in the last line 19 4 The vi Editor Table 19 2 S
25. The menu contains three items Language Select the language to use in the following GNOME session You may change the language temporarily for just the next session or set the choice permanently as your default Session Determine the session type GNOME KDE etc Change this set ting only if you want to use something other than the system default Fu ture sessions will always be of the same type as the initial one unless you 1 1 Logging In and Out Welcome to K31 Username Figure 1 1 A GDM Login Screen change the session type manually If you change your session type manu ally you will be asked whether the changes should be applied to the follow ing sessions or whether they should be made default for all future sessions Actions Choose some system related actions such as shutting down the system rebooting it or configuring the login manager To terminate the session choose Log Out from the System menu Then deter mine whether you want to save the current state of your session end your ses sion and leave the system running or restart or shut down on logout Choose to save your session if you want to start your next one with exactly the same setup as when you leave 1 1 2 Introducing KDM A KDM login screen consists of two main elements As shown in Figure 1 2 on the next page it has input fields for username and password and a menu The menu provides the following options SUSE LINUX fODJ
26. This book has been printed on 100 chlorine free bleached paper Welcome The SUSE LINUX User Guide was written to introduce the Linux operating sys tem and its wealth of applications to Linux novices Get to know your choices for a Linux desktop and learn how to configure and control it Despite its aim towards novices it still provides a variety of information helpful for the experi enced user The SUSE LINUX User Guide consists of six major parts featuring the following aspects of your SUSE LINUX system Introducing Linux Get started with Linux Learn how to manage your desk top and how to perform basic administrative tasks A comprehensive list comparing Windows and Linux applications helps you find the appropri ate Linux counterparts of your favorite Windows applications As for the desktop choose from two alternatives GNOME or KDE and learn more about their strengths and highlights Finally learn where to get more infor mation and help for your Linux system Office OpenOffice org is a powerful substitute for any Office suite you might have used under Windows or Mac OS Learn how to use it and how to mi grate your existing data Linux also provides two fully fledged personal information management suites Evolution and Kontact Both offer e mail calendar address management and many other functionalities Internet Linux offers two great browser alternatives Firefox and Konqueror Get to know how to use them and how to e
27. View menu Use the search bar to find an entered appointment Add appointments and tasks using the buttons in the toolbar Also use the toolbar to page through the calendar or jump to a spe cific date SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld Jopue o2 puo ID JA 3 UY uOunjo 3 119 120 7 2 4 Tasks Tasks provides a list of tasks Details of the selected task are shown in the lower part of the window Use File gt New gt Task to add a new task Search the tasks with the search bar Assign tasks to others by right clicking the task and selecting Assign Task Open the task to add more details such as due date and completion status 7 3 Mail The Evolution mail component can work with multiple accounts in a variety of formats It offers useful features such as virtual folders for showing search re sults and filtering for junk mail Configure the application in Edit Prefer ences 7 3 1 Configuring Accounts Evolution is capable of fetching e mail from multiple mail accounts The account from which to send e mail can be selected when composing a message Configure mail accounts in Edit Preferences gt Mail Accounts To modify an existing configuration select it and click Edit To delete an account select it and click Delete To add a new account click Add This opens the configuration assistant Click Forward to use it Enter your name and your e mail add
28. application firefox Find more information about Firefox at http www mozilla org products firefox and read our introduction to using Firefox in Chap ter TT on page 157 Opera Opera is a powerful Web browser with neat add ons like an optional e mail client and a chat module Opera offers pop up blocking RSS feeds built in and customizable searches a password manager and tabbed browsing The main functionalities are easily reached via their respective panels Because this tool is also available for Windows it allows a much easier transition to Linux for those who have been using it under Windows Find more information about Opera at http www opera com Evolution Evolution is personal information management software for the GNOME desktop combining mail calendar and address book functional ity It offers advanced e mail filter and search options provides sync func tionality for Palm devices and allows you to run Evolution as an Exchange or GroupWise client to integrate better into heterogenous environments Find more information about Evolution at http www gnome org projects evolution and read our introduction to using Evolution in Chapter 7 on page 117 Kontact Kontact is the KDE personal information management suite It includes e mail calendar address book and Palm sync functionalities Like Evolu tion it can act as an Exchange or GroupWise client Kontact combines sev eral stand alone KDE applications KMai
29. be moved directly to the trash with a filter There are two options for creating a new filter creating a filter from scratch or creating a filter based on a message to filter The latter is extremely useful for filtering messages sent to a mailing list Setting Up a Filter Select Tools gt Filters This dialog lists your existing filters which can be edited or deleted Click Add to create a new filter To create a filter based on a message instead select the message then Tools gt Create Filter from Message Enter a name for the new filter in Rule Name Select the criteria to use for the filter Options include sender recipients source account subject date and status The drop box showing Contains provides a variety of options such as contains is and is not Select the appropriate condition Enter the text for which to search Click Add to add more filter criteria Use Execute actions to determine if all or only some of the criteria must be met to apply the filter In the lower part of the window determine the action to take when the filter cri teria are met Messages can for example be moved or copied to a folder or as signed a special color When moving or copying select the destination folder by clicking In the folder list that appears select the folder Use New to create a new folder Click OK when the correct folder is selected When finished creating the filt
30. cessed by your filters and can help locate the problem 8 4 Contacts The contacts component uses KAddressBook Configure it with Settings Configure KAddressBook To search for a particular contact use the search bar With Filter select to display only contacts in a certain category Right click a contact to open a menu in which to select from a variety of options such as send ing the contact information in an e mail 8 4 1 Adding Contacts To add a contact with the name and e mail address from an e mail right click the address in the mail component and select Open in Address Book To add a completely new contact select File New Contact in the address component Both methods open a dialog in which to enter information about the contact 8 4 Contacts File Edit View Tools Settings Help A Bem ze 20 14 CA D Search in Visible Fields v Filter None X Summary Formatted Name Email Address Tux Penguin a Geeko Lizard geeko example com Mail Tux Penguin tux example com E Home 234 123 4567 Contacts Work 234 123 4568 3 Email tux example com Calendar Home 2 Mascot Drive Linux OS 55555 Address Books To do List El resource UNITED STATES Journal Notes la Feeds Synchronization Add Figure 8 3 The Kontact Address Book In the General tab enter basic contact information such as name e mail ad dresses and telep
31. double click the parent folder instant apply Any configuration dialog opened from a GNOME application or as part of the GNOME desktop configuration follows the principle of in stant apply Once you enter your preferences just click the Close button to save them and leave the dialog You will not find any Apply OK or Cancel buttons in this kind of dialog 3 1 The Desktop The most important elements of the GNOME desktop are the icons on the desk top the panels at the top and bottom border of the screen and the panel menus The mouse is your most important tool although GNOME has built in support for assistive technologies such as braille speech synthesizers and on screen key boards to support handicapped users For details on these technologies refer to Section 8 5 on pagel65 3 1 1 The Icons The default GNOME desktop features at least the following desktop icons pro viding basic navigation and functionalities of your system Trash Anything you want to delete can be dropped onto the Trash desktop icon As long as you do not empty the trash can these items are not deleted permanently and can still be restored Home The Home desktop icon provides easy access to your private data 3 1 The Desktop Computer The Computer desktop icon can be used to quickly access any de vice attached to your computer This includes hard drives partitions digital cameras and USB flash drives
32. http developer berlios de projects noteedit LilyPond LilyPond is a free music sheet editor Because the input format is text based you can use any text editor to create note sheets Users do not need to tackle any formatting or notation issues like spacing line breaking or polyphonic collisions All these issues are automatically resolved by Lily Pond It supports many special notations like chord names and tablatures The output can be exported to PNG TeX PDF PostScript and MIDI Find more information about LilyPond at http 1ilypond org web SUSE LINUX SIOMIJOS SU OUM OL Buieo 39 40 Rosegarden Rosegarden is a free music composition and editing environment It features an audio and MIDI sequencer and a score editor Find more infor mation about Rosegarden at http rosegardenmusic com MainActor MainActor is a fully fledged video authoring software Because there is a Windows version of MainActor transition from Windows is easy Find more information about MainActor at http www mainactor com xawtv and motv xawtv is a TV viewer and recorder application supporting analog TV motv is basically the same as xawtv but with a slightly differ ent user interface Find more information on the xawtv project at http linux bytesex org xawtv xawtv4 xawtv4 is a successor of the xawtv application It supports both analog and digital audio and video broadcasts The xawtv4 package contains sev eral useful appli
33. is the right tool This mod ule shows a list of your personal fonts Clicking a font displays a sentence in the SUSE LINUX doptiseq 3q eut 77 78 respective face Easily add new fonts with Add Fonts To change system fonts click Administrator Mode The module Linux Kernel only takes effect if you have installed the source of your kernel It is only useful if you are a developer compiling a new kernel and want to customize some options With Login Manager change the appearance the fonts used the background shown the shutdown behavior what users are displayed and some convenience issues for the login screen To change the default paths of KDE go to Paths You can customize three differ ent paths desktop autostart and documents 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Konqueror is a unified Web browser file manager document viewer and image viewer This section covers the use of Konqueror for file management If you are interested in Konqueror as a Web browser see Chapter 10 on page Start Konqueror by clicking the house icon in the panel or by pressing and entering konqueror HOME The contents of your home directory are then displayed The file manager window consists of the menu bar at the top the tool bar and the location bar The lower part of the window is split vertically into the navigation panel and the main window which displays the contents 4 3 1 File Preview Konqueror c
34. it is usually a good idea to save a copy as XCF to simplify future modifications PAT This is the format used for GIMP patterns Saving an image in this format enables using the image as a fill pattern in GIMP JPG JPG or JPEG is a common format for photographs and Web page graph ics without transparency Its compression method enables reduction of file sizes but information is lost when compressing It may be a good idea to use the preview option when adjusting the compression level Levels of 85 to 75 often result in an acceptable image quality with reasonable compression Saving a backup in a lossless format like XCF is also recom mended If editing an image save only the finished image as JPG Repeat edly loading a JPG then saving can quickly result in poor image quality GIF Although very popular in the past for graphics with transparency GIF is less often used now because of license issues GIF is also used for animated images The format can only save indexed images The file size can often be quite small if only a few colors are used 18 4 Saving Images PNG With its support for transparency lossless compression free availability and increasing browser support PNG is replacing GIF as the preferred format for Web graphics with transparency An added advantage is that PNG offers partial transparency which is not offered by GIF This enables smoother transitions from colored areas to transparent areas antialiasing To
35. k Output in kilobytes m Output in megabytes date option s Thissimple program displays the current system time If run as root it can also be used to change the system time Details about the program are available in man date 1 Processes top options s top provides a quick overview of the currently running processes Press H to access a page that briefly explains the main options to customize the program ps option s process ID If run without any options this command displays a table of all your own programs or processes those you started The options for this command are not preceded by hyphen 19 3 Important Linux Commands aux Displays a detailed list of all processes independent of the owner kill option s process ID Unfortunately sometimes a program cannot be terminated in the normal way In most cases you should still be able to stop such a runaway program by executing the ki11 command specifying the respective process ID see top and ps ki11 sends a TERM signal that instructs the program to shut itself down If this does not help the follow ing parameter can be used 9 Sends a KILL signal instead of a TERM signal bringing the specified process to an end in almost all cases killall option s processname This command is similar to k i11 but uses the process name instead of the process ID as an argument killing all processes with that name IOUS eut UM 8uptoM Network ping option s
36. locate iaa Aa 264 Drum EE i6 A des Ae ee 4 z KIM WEE Bl S SSIONS oori neba rei iaaa RES eee eee le EE 246 1261 M man pages mirrors Midis iaa 124911262 MOLE eiii MOV erm E e WEE launchers proportions sses manpreni nhas seeking channels video source 0 eee eee eee rue Mozilla ire aii MS DOS commands 0ce cece eens 254 SO AAA 254 MOOLS xia tec ee Sage AE oce P cece 1254 WN ra ar iia 261 N Nautilus side citet dee aeree en CD creation configuring MIME types navigating gege cese he aaa 97 networks i esee ck reed Du setie ease configuring Internet wireless nslookup 6 6 idrata sanninna seedimine HVEDE ts decee es EE E CIE Index importing database 201 O Ogg Vorbis 2 cerent die EE OpenOffice org 0 66 cece cece application modules EE lI Impress ves teense eene Microsoft document formats Navigator ccc cee eee eee selecting text 0 cee Styles ode Presta be Unos Wizards EEN s Writer PR RD P partitioning 272 GNU Parted occooocococccccccccccro 44 passwd DEER 268 passwords changing eire a EEr nE EEEE A 268 DE deeg astas EnEn tea EE Sen 250 SE 250 EE 250 working with 250 PDAs Evolution s Kontact 2i cssc cible SEU nuera riae eh bens PDE viewers iia beer ee kx ems s permissions 6 cece k eee ee eee access control lists changing
37. the current ses sion disappears into the background and the system switches to a new lo gin screen Each session has a function key assigned to it F7 represents the first session the second one and so on To switch between different ses sions press Ctrl Alf Fx where Fx is the function key corresponding to the desired session Lock Screen If you leave your workstation and do not log out you should use this function to prevent others from gaining access to your files Depending on the setting the screen turns blank or starts displaying a screensaver To continue using the computer enter your password SUSE LINUX 71 72 Logout Log out of your system if you are not going to use the system for some time 4 1 2 The Main Menu Open the main menu by clicking the icon to the far left of the panel Alternatively press Af FT The main menu is subdivided into these sections Most Used Ap plications All Applications a menu with all applications sorted according to categories and Actions The following section provides information about a number of actions that can be triggered from the main menu Detailed informa tion about the Control Center is available in Section 4 2 on the next page Bookmarks By selecting Edit Bookmarks from this menu start an editor in which to organize your bookmarks If you select one of the bookmarks present in the menu the Konqueror browser starts
38. them The taskbar is part of the panel quick launcher The quick launcher is part of the panel It holds the icons for the most important functions or applications to enable you to start them without going through the applications menu notification area or system tray The rightmost part of the panel holds the sys tem clock the volume control and several other helper applications applet An applet is a small application that is integrated into the panel An ap plication is a fully fledged computer program using its own window on screen desktop icons Desktop icons reside on the desktop They represent files direc tories applications or functions and removable media like CDs or DVDs The best known desktop icon is probably the trash bin where you can drop files you want to delete virtual desktops or workspaces The concept of virtual desktops workspaces in GNOME is like having several desks at your office You store things on all of them but you only work at one of them at a time You can devote each to different tasks or just use them as extra space Virtual desktops enable you to have multiple windows open at the same time but only look at one or some of them Easily shift windows between virtual desktops like shifting papers from one physical desk to another All desktop environments offer a means to control the number and use of virtual desktops A workspace switcher is provided in both the GNOME and the KDE panel termina
39. under File gt Edit Album Otherwise just start the ripping and encoding with File gt Rip Selection Watch the progress of these jobs using the Jobs tab If configured accordingly KAudioCreator also generates playlist files for your selection that can be used by players like amaroK or XMMS Compressing Audio CDs Using Konqueror Before you start the actual ripping process with Konqueror configure the han dling of audio CDs and the Ogg Vorbis encoder in the KDE Control Center Select Sound amp Multimedia Audio CDs The configuration module is divided into 13 3 CDs Playback and Ripping File Settings Help c O E ue SS Number of jobs in the queue 15 O Job Progress Description 5 01 1 Ripping mi coraz n me recuerda 02 0 Ripping el feo 03 0 Ripping sale sobrando 2 04 0 Ripping corazoncito tirano Kl 05 0 Ripping la ni a 06 0 ghRipping hanal weech 07 0 Ripping medley pastures of plenty this land is your la 08 0 Ripping la linea 09 0 Ripping el bracero fracasado 10 0 Ripping tr nsito 11 096 Ripping smoke acteal E 12 096 Ca Rinnina la martiniana b Remove Completed Jobs Remove All Jobs Remove Selected Jobs Ripping 1 active 14 queued Figure 13 8 Ripping Audio CDs with KAudioCreator three tabs General Names and Ogg Vorbis Encoder Normally a suitable C
40. use aspects of the mail such as sender or size to move mail to certain folders delete unwanted mails bounce mails back to the sender or perform a number of other actions SUSE LINUX uJDJ80Jg Jopue o2 puo IDJA 3 UY ODC 135 136 Setting Up a Filter To create a filter from scratch select Settings gt Configure Filters To create a filter based on an existing message select the desired message then select Tools gt Create Filter and the desired filter criteria Select the match method for filter criteria all or any Then select criteria that ap plies only to the desired messages In Filter Actions set what the filter should do to the messages that meet the criteria Advanced Options provides control over when the filter is applied and whether additional filters should be considered for these messages Applying Filters Filter are applied in the order listed in the dialog accessed with Settings gt Con figure Filters Change the order by selecting a filter and clicking the arrow but tons Filters are only applied to new incoming messages or sent messages as spec ified in the filter s advanced options To apply filters to existing messages select the desired messages then Message gt Apply Filters If your filters do not act as expected monitor them with Tools gt Filter Log Viewer When logging is enabled in this dialog it shows how messages are pro
41. 16 00 Schlemmerreise Italien 2 MOR e BR 15 minutes 11 01 15 30 1545 Die Altstadt von Trogir Kroatien 3Sat 11 01 15 30 16 00 Room Raiders 23 MTV m 11 01 15 30 16 00 Die Fallers eine Schwarzwaldfamilie sw H ay KI Big Brother Die Entscheidung Show Gameshow MTV2 Tue 11 01 13 00 16 00 Show Moderation Ruth Moschner Oli P y Grid Layout pL 2 database 99 complete Acquisition is starting up for RTL 2 Figure 14 2 The Electronic TV Magazine nxtvepg If you have not started a TV application let nxtvepg search for EPG broadcasters To do this use Configure gt Provider scan Use xatv is activated by default This indicates that nxtvepg is accessing the broadcasters saved in this file Tip Troubleshooting If there are problems check to see if the proper video source has been chosen under TV card input Tip Select from the EPG providers found in Configure gt Select Provider Config ure gt Merge Providers even creates flexible associations between the various provider databases 14 4 2 Sorting the Programs nxtvepg provides a convenient filter function for managing even the most ex tensive program offerings Activate a network selection list with Configure 202 14 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC Show networks The Filter menu offers plenty of filter functions Right click the program list to open a s
42. 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld Synchronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot Handheld computers are in widespread use among users who need to have their schedules to do lists and notes with them everywhere they go Often users want the same data to be available both on the desktop and on the portable device This is where KPilot comes in it is a tool to synchronize data on a handheld with that used by the KDE applications KAddressBook KOrganizer and KNotes which are part of Kontact 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot o ooa aaa 142 9 2 Configuring the Handheld Connection 143 9 3 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit 144 9 4 Managing To Do Items and Events 145 9 5 Working with KPilot 146 JO ldM ULM JOLNAWOD pjeupupH o Bulzluolyou s 142 The main purpose of KPilot is to allow sharing of data between the applications of a handheld computer and their KDE counterparts KPilot does come with its own built in memo viewer address viewer and file installer but these cannot be used outside the KPilot environment Independent KDE applications are avail able for all these functions except the file installer For communication between the handheld and the different desktop programs KPilot relies on conduits KPilot itself is the program that oversees any data ex change between the two computer devices Using a particular function of the handheld on your desktop computer
43. Completed 2341 1 2 5 tux mozilla ps Completed 2341 1 F Q yo tux mozilla ps Completed 2341 1 E O 4 41 Keep window permanent Max Unlimited Figure 1 6 Managing Print Jobs with KJob Viewer you need the document Filter enables you to switch between various printers toggle completed jobs and limit the view to your own print jobs by selecting Show Only User Jobs The current user is then displayed in the top right field Settings gt Configure KJobViewer opens a configuration dialog Here deter mine the maximum number of print jobs to display Enter a number in the field or use the slider to the right to determine a value Press OK to save the setting or Cancel to exit the dialog without saving The icons in the toolbar correspond to the functions you can access by way of the menu A help text explaining the function is displayed when you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons The job list consists of eight columns The job ID is automatically assigned by the print system to identify the various jobs The next column contains the login of the user who sent the job followed by the filename of the document The status column indicates whether a job is still in the queue currently being printed or already completed Next the size of the document is displayed in kilobytes and number of pages The default priority of 50 can be increased or reduced if nec essary Billing information can be
44. GNOME has many applets and applications They are designed to interact with the desktop and each other This section introduces some of them Learn how to manage little notes on your desktop use the GNOME dictionary chat with Gaim and enjoy various types of multimedia applications doptsed 3INON9 SUL 3 4 1 Taking Notes with Tomboy Tomboy is a smart little panel applet offering a note application for the GNOME desktop Left click the panel icon to open the Tomboy menu and select Create New Note Enter the text of your note Notes can be linked with each other by clicking Link These links even survive renaming and reorganizing A Search Notes function located in the panel menu of Tomboy lets you search your notes Web links and e mail addresses can also be dropped onto Tomboy 3 4 2 Dictionary Dictionary command gnome dictionary is a useful applet for checking the spelling and meaning of words An Internet connection is required because this applet accesses an online dictionary Enter the term to look up in Word The menu under Dictionary gives a choice between Look Up Word and Check Spelling By default the query is sent to the dict org server To use a different server select Edit Preferences See a sam ple entry in FigureB 4 on the next page dict org allows you to choose between various databases for special vocabularies such as jargon or computer terminol ogy Under Default
45. Information to your KDE panel to monitor the state of your wireless connection Clicking the panel icon reveals the details of your wire less connection including network name ESSID link quality signal strength noise level bit rate and encryption method If you have more than one wire less device switch between them using the drop down menu at the top right If you touch the panel icon with the mouse cursor a tool tip opens showing device name link quality and current bit rate SUSE LINUX 27 28 1 9 2 Mobile Computing Working on a mobile computer requires a great deal of flexibility in adjusting to changing network and system environments SUSE LINUX offers small helpers like GNOME Battery Charge Monitor KPowersave and Profile Chooser which assist you in adjusting the power management scheme and the system configura tion of your computer Tip More Information about Mobile Computing Refer to the Administration Guide to learn more about mobile comput ing under SUSE LINUX Get an introduction to the software compo nents involved and learn how to configure your mobile devices for maximum flexibility Tip Power Management Successfully working on battery power requires a very sophisticated handling of the system resources by the operating system Mobile hardware is optimized to allow a very flexible management of power usage by the CPU and other com ponents Depending on the environment in which the s
46. Opol O9plA Al 201 If you set an EPG broadcaster in motv nxtvepg immediately begins importing the current list of TV programs The progress is displayed Nextview EPG TV Movie nexTView 3 Control Configure Reminder Shortcuts Filter Navigate Help araz BS Date me mie Network Mark Tue 16 11 42 VT mor 1200 1600 Big Brolner Die Entscheidung MTV2 gt uel Ae pg 1181 14 00 16 00 Dreizwoeins aNE o 11 01 1500 16 00 Das Familiengericht RTL e B 11 01 15 00 16 00 Richterin Barbara Salesch Sei ci ERG 1101 15 00 16 00 Planet Wissen WDR D 11 01 15 00 17 00 DSI as Sportquiz H movies 1101 15 00 16 30 Skispringen EURO e sports 11 01 1500 1700 Planet VIVA Spezial VIVA o no sports 1101 15 02 16 35 Zuhause ist der Teufel los RBB series 11 01 15 05 16 05 Eine himmlische Familie 139 VOX 2 kids 11 01 1505 1535 c t magazin o Ue 1101 15 10 1540 Inuyasha 38 R2 e 1101 15 10 16 00 Freunde f rs Leben ZDF D LE 11 01 15 10 15 55 Die Hausmeisterin BR L social 1101 1515 16 00 Kongo 1 ARD o ma science 1101 15 15 16 00 Wunderbare Wasserwege 1 N3 8 hobbies 11 01 15 15 17 00 Hommage an Jacques Brel ARTE e n music 11 01 15 15 15 40 Hey Amoldl 7 SuperAT e culture 11 01 1820 1615 Emergency Room Die Notaufnahme kabel e adult 11 01 15 25 15 50 Codename The Boy Kinderka 11 01 15 30 16 00 Freunde Das Leben geht weiter Pro7 ej evening 11 01 15 30
47. Right clicking an icon displays a menu offering file operations like copying cut ting or renaming Selecting Properties from the menu displays a configuration dialog The title of an icon and the icon itself can be changed with Use custom icon Use the Permissions tab to view and modify the access read and write permission settings for this file for the user the group or others The Notes tab manages comments The menu for the trash can additionally features the Empty Trashcan option This deletes its contents To remove an icon from the desktop simply move it into the trash can However be careful with this option if you throw folder icons or file icons into the trash can the actual data is deleted If the icons only represent links to a file or direc tory only the links are deleted To create a link on the desktop to a folder or a file access the object in question with Nautilus Right click the object and select Make Link Drag the link from the Nautilus window and drop it on the desktop 3 1 2 The Desktop Context Menu Right clicking a free spot on the desktop displays a menu with various options Select New Folder to create a new folder Create a launcher icon for an appli cation with New Launcher Provide the name of the application and the com mand for starting it then choose an icon to represent it The order and alignment of desktop icons are controlled via Clean Up by Name a
48. Settings Use the GNOME control center to customize your desktop Access it with Desk top gt Preferences The most important and prominent modules of the GNOME control center are featured in the following sections In the individual modules access relevant help for the options with Help The system immediately adopts every change made in a configuration module 3 2 1 Keyboard The Keyboard configuration module consists of four tabs The Keyboard tab determines key repeats and cursor blinking Keyboard layouts can be configured in the second tab specifying the keyboard model and the localized keyboard lay out Layout Options can be used to activate special keyboard features like Win keys Typing breaks can be configured in the fourth tab Typing Break With this the screen is shut down after a certain time to force you to take breaks from screen work Exit the Keyboard module with Close or go the accessibility mod ule with Accessibility The functionality of this module is described in Section 8 2 8Jon page 54 3 2 2 Mouse Configuration The mouse configuration consists of three tabs Buttons Cursor and Motion The configuration options of the Buttons tab refer to the Mouse Orientation Left handed users should activate Left handed mouse to swap the right and left mouse buttons Use the slider to determine the maximum delay in seconds between two cl
49. There are plenty of packaging programs for reducing disk us age In general they differ only in their pack algorithm Linux can also han dle the packaging formats used on Windows Find more information about gzip and tar in Section File Administration on pageD61 bzip2 is a bit more efficient than gzip but needs more time depending on the pack al gorithm GNU Parted GNU Parted is a command line tool for creating destroying resiz ing checking and copying partitions and the file systems on them If you need to create space for new operating systems use this tool to reorganize disk usage and copy data between different hard disks Find more informa tion at http www gnu org software parted dar Dar stands for disk archive and is a hardware independent backup solu tion Dar uses catalogs unlike tar so it is possible to extract a single file without having to read the whole archive and it is also possible to cre ate incremental backups There is also a GUI version for KDE available at http kdar sourceforge net Find more information about dar at http dar linux free fr taper Taper is a backup and restore program that provides a friendly user in terface to allow backup and restoration of files to and from a tape drive Alternatively files can be backed up to archive files Recursively selected directories are supported Find more information at http taper sourceforge net dump The dump package contains both dump and re
50. Y 7 00 E Lunch Calendar 8 00 a On 2005 03 02 From 12 15 To Y 13 00 9 00 To do List i te 2005 02 55 La Creation date 2005 02 28 14 55 10 00 Journal 11 00 N Calendar S EI Default KOrganizer resource 12 00 E z xi 2 eeds 7 Synchronization Add Edit Remove Figure 8 4 The Kontact Calendar 8 5 1 Scheduling an Event Add a new event or meeting with Actions gt New Event Enter the desired de tails Under Reminder specify the exact time minutes hours or days in ad vance at which the attendees should be reminded of the event If an event recurs specify the interval Another way to create an event at a specific point in the cal endar is to double click the corresponding field in one of the program s calendar views This opens the same dialog window as that available from the menu Specify the attendees of an event by entering their data manually in the dialog or by inserting data from the address book To enter such data manually select New To import data from the address book click Select Addressee then select the corresponding entries from the dialog To schedule the event based on the participants availability go to Free Busy and click Pick Date Use the Recurrence tab to configure an event that happens on a regular basis Attachments can be convenient for linking other information with the
51. add a new one an empty mount point mv opt opt old mkdir opt Use an editor to add the new partitions in etc fstab This could resemble the line in Example A 1 on this page Example A 1 Sample Line in etc fstab for an Additional Partition dev hdb1 opt ext 2 defaults 1 2 OVA XANI ISNS Now shut down the computer and reboot 6 After rebooting check that dev hdb1 has actually been mounted to opt using the command mount If everything is working as desired remove the old data from opt old cd rm fr opt old How can I find out how much space is available in Linux Use the df hT command h converts the byte sizes into human readable format such as 1K 234M or 2G and T prints the type of file system Applications How can I install applications Applications included in the SUSE LINUX CDs are best installed with YaST How can I enter commands in GNOME or KDE In KDE click the screen with shell icon in the panel to start the Bash shell Alternative terminals can be started via the main menu In GNOME select a terminal from the main menu To run a single command in KDE or GNOME press Alf F2 then enter the command I cannot find many programs in GNOME or KDE You can start all programs from a terminal window by entering the pro gram name and pressing Enter How do I connect to the Internet in Linux Section KInternet Connecting to the Internet on page 24 provides informa tion about this Alter
52. and loads the corre sponding URL Run Command This item opens a dialog in which to enter a command You can use it to start an application whose command you know without navi gating through the program submenus Switch User To start a second session with a graphical user interface on your machine select Start New Session from the main menu Your current ses sion remains active while you are taken to the login screen Log in You can also start another window manager Access the first session by pressing F7 Press instead of to access the new session Additional sessions can be accessed by pressing Ctr AI F9 to F12 Lock Session If you leave your workstation you can blank your screen or start a screensaver Access to the session can only be regained with a password To unlock enter your normal login password Locking the screen ensures that others cannot read or manipulate your documents or e mail messages Log Out You can log out from the system by means of this menu item How ever first you are asked what should happen after the logout If you select Login as different user the login screen is displayed allowing you or an other user to log in to the system You can also shut down and turn off the computer or shut it down and reboot immediately Confirm your selection with OK or remain logged in by clicking Cancel 4 1 Desktop Components 4 2 Settings The KDE desktop can be
53. and select Open link in new tab Right click the tab itself to access more tab options You can create a new tab reload one or all existing tabs or close them 11 1 2 Using the Sidebar Use the left side of your browser window for viewing bookmarks or the brows ing history Extensions may add new ways to use the sidebar as well To display the Sidebar select View Sidebar and select the desired contents 11 2 Finding Information There are two ways to find information in Firefox the search bar and the find bar 11 2 1 Using the Search Bar Firefox has a search bar that can access different engines like Google Yahoo or Amazon For example if you want to find information about SUSE using the cur rent engine click in the search bar type SUSE and hit Enter The results appear in your window To choose your search engine click the icon in the search bar A menu opens with a list of available search engines 11 2 2 Using the Find Bar To search inside a Web page click Edit Find in This Page or press and the find bar opens Usually it is displayed at the bottom of a window Type your query in the input field Firefox highlights all occurrences of this phrase With Highlight enable and disable the highlighting SUSE LINUX 159 160 11 3 Managing Bookmarks Bookmarks offer a convenient way of saving links to your favorite Web sites To add the current Web site to your list of
54. bookmarks click Bookmarks gt Book mark This Page If your browser currently displays multiple Web sites on tabs only the URL on the currently selected tab is added to your list of bookmarks When adding a bookmark you can specify an alternative name for the bookmark and select a folder where Firefox should store it To remove a Web site from the bookmarks list click Bookmarks right click the bookmark in the list then click Delete 11 3 1 Using the Bookmark Manager The bookmark manager can be used to manage the properties name and address location for each bookmark and organize the bookmarks into folders and sec tions It resembles Figure on the next page To open the bookmark manager click Bookmark Manage Bookmarks A window opens and displays your bookmarks With New Folder create a new folder with a name and a description If you need a new bookmark click New Bookmark This let you insert the name location keywords and also a descrip tion The keyword is a shortcut to your bookmark If you need your newly cre ated bookmark in the sidebar check Load this bookmark in the sidebar 11 3 2 Migrating Bookmarks If you used a different browser in the past you probably want to use your pref erences and bookmarks in Firefox too At the moment you can import from Netscape 4 x 6 7 Mozilla 1 x and Opera To import your settings click File Import Select
55. clicked in a Web or file browser The actual file type and the MIME type of a file are closely associated with each other An HTML file has the file type html and would be registered to have a MIME type text html Nautilus has built in support for most of the common MIME types and proposes the appropriate application when you choose to open a file In this case it would propose a Web browser However you might want to change the MIME type for certain files if you are not quite happy with the default applications suggested by Nautilus Changing the default application assigned to a certain MIME type is very straightforward See FigureB 3 on the following page Procedure 3 1 Editing the MIME Type 1 Right click a file of the MIME type in question in a Nautilus window 2 Select Properties from the menu that opens 3 Choose the Open With tab from the Properties dialog 4 Click Add and Browse to search for a suitable application 5 Leave the dialog with Close If a MIME type has not yet been properly registered the procedure is the same as described above These modifications are applied globally which means that any file of this type is subsequently opened by the application defined SUSE LINUX doptsed JWONSD SUL 59 60 Basic Emblems Permissions Open With Notes Select an application to open mozilla ps and others of type PostScript document KGhostView Karbon14 ll Po
56. configuration of file types 11 5 Customizing Firefox With the ability to install extensions change themes and add smart keywords for your online searches Firefox can be customized extensively SUSE LINUX I 162 11 5 1 Extensions Mozilla Firefox is a multifunctional application which means you can down load and install add ons known as extensions For example add a new down load manager and mouse gestures This has the advantage that Firefox itself stays small and unbloated To add an extension click Tools gt Extensions In the bottom right corner click Get More Extensions to launch the Mozilla extensions update Web page where you can choose from a variety of available extensions Click the extension to in stall then click the install link to download and install it When you restart Fire fox the new extension is functional You can also look at the various extensions at http update mozilla org Ji Bandwidth Tester 0 4 1 This item will be installed after you restart Firefox Jie ForecastFox 0 5 9 This item will be installed after you restart Firefox Figure 11 3 Installing Firefox Extensions 11 5 2 Changing Themes If you do not like the standard look and feel of Firefox install a new theme Themes do not change the functionality only the appearance of the browser When installing a theme Firefox asks for confirmation first Allow the installa tion or to cancel it Af
57. cost centers or other company specific infor mation If you right click a job in the list the Jobs menu opens under the mouse pointer allowing you to select an action Only a few functions are available for completed jobs If you activate Keep window permanent KJobViewer opens au tomatically when you log in the next time SUSE LINUX 21 22 1 7 Basic Administrative Tasks In SUSE LINUX YaST handles the system installation and configuration The fol lowing sections introduce some frequently needed functions of this tool Refer to the Administration Guide for a detailed description of YaST and background infor mation about system administration 1 7 1 Installing New Applications To install a new application start YaST from the main menu Provide the root password when requested to do so Check whether the installation source is valid in the Change Source of Installation module If you intend to install from the original SUSE LINUX CDs or DVDs the active installation path should begin with cd or dvd If you intend to install from a network installation path ask your system administrator for the full data select Add and the type of net work source and enter the full path Leave the dialog with Finish Start the YaST Install and Remove Software module Enter the name of the de sired application in the Search bar and hit Search Any packages matching your search criterion are listed in the r
58. dow With the toolbar choose some important options such as the zoom factor the refresh rate and how KMag should behave You can magnify around the mouse cursor show a window for selecting the magnified area or magnify the entire screen With F5 halt the process Press it again to restart it KTTS The KDE Text to Speech Manager KTTS is an implementation of a system for producing speech from text This en ables other applications to use this subsystem in a consistent manner The ca pabilities of KTTS include speaking the content of a text file KDE notification events and all or part of the text of a Web page in Konqueror Before configure KTTS make sure that you have festival and the KDE accessibility package in stalled SUSE LINUX doptseq Jay eut 93 94 E Note Additional Languages Due to incompatible licenses only the English may be included in our distribution For more information about festival see http festvox org Note To start KTTS press and type ktt smgr If you have not configured KTTS yet the talkers screen appears with an empty list Click Add to add a talker to the list This opens a new dialog box Select a speech synthesis plug in by name or by language When the synthesizer method is chosen the synthesizer box and the language box are updated For example check the synthesizer box and choose Festival Interactive If you leave with OK the synthesizer automatically confi
59. eee ene KMail asias daria ENGSTE EE Konqueror 6 0 0 cece ee eee Kontact iis tte chin ete bei ats 140 address books oooooooooooo 136 Kooka bookmarks usususs digital cameras file associations file manager sssl 78 image galleries S m ES JavaScript secet bee Eeer es keywords eese eene previewing files o oo 5 EE saving Web pages A sie peers E oce ob e seg epe eher attachments Calendar Contacts isses see rhe creating messages sss encryption sse Exchange SE Ee LOS a EnA Groupwise iperpru nione identities importing mail m PDAsand 5 2 mehreren milan SE E summary e ees to dolists 0 cece eee eee character recognition configuring 6 cece eee el EE US aene les previews o oocococconccnccnnnnannn oo scanning 66 cee eee eee eee eee SC TETTE KOrganizer 66 6 0c cece ee KPilot iine tenth 2 dev EE backups oooocccooocccconccccnnrns configuring esses SUSE LINUX 283 284 installing programs with 147 KAddressBook 144 KOrganizer ee knee sarees ASYNCING crisis idas 146 SEN eegene E E 188 L US 252 1264 Linux removing arere ikure eee eee eee 273 Mie Ss CNET EE 262
60. enter John as title and optionally set an icon Confirm with Ok After creating your tag assign it to the desired pictures Go to each album and select the respective photographs Right click and choose Assign Tag gt People gt John from the menu that appears Alternativly drag the photographs to the tag name under My Tags and drop them there Repeat as necessary with other albums View all the images by clicking My Tags gt People gt John You can assign more than one tag to each photograph Editing tags and comments can be tedious To simplify this task right click a photograph and select Edit Comments amp Tags This opens a dialog box with a preview a comment field and a tag list Now you can insert all the needed tags and add a comment With Forward and Back navigate in your album Store your changes with Apply and leave with Ok 16 6 6 Useful Tools Digikam provides several tools to simplify some tasks Find them in the Tools menu The following is a small selection of the available tools Creating a Calendar If you want to please someone a custom calendar can be a nice gift Go to Tools gt Create Calendar which opens a wizard dialog like that in Figure on the facing page Customize the settings paper size image position font etc and confirm with Next Now you can enter the year and select the images to use
61. file managers of GNOME and KDE in Section 3 3Jon page 57 and Section 4 3 on page 8 904002 4511 1 4 1 The Concept behind a Linux File System Unlike a Windows operating system Linux does not use drive letters In Win dows you would address the floppy drive as A V Windows system data is un der C V and so on In Linux all files and directories are located in a tree like structure The topmost directory is referred to as the file system root or just All other directories can be accessed from here The following is a short guide through the Linux file system tree introducing the most important directories home username home holds the private data of every user who has an account on your system The files located here can only be modified by their owner or the system administrator Your e mail directory is located here for example media media generally holds any type of drive except the hard drive of your system Your USB flash drive appears under media once you have con nected it as does your digital camera if it uses USB or your DVD or CD drive As soon as the data source is disconnected think of an USB flash drive or your camera the respective directory under media is removed as well usr share doc Under usr share doc find any kind of documentation on your Linux system and the installed packages The manua1 subdirectory holds a digital copy of this manual as well as the Administration Guide and the re
62. it The messages it contains appear in the top right frame The number of messages is also displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the appli cation window 8 1 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs File Settings Help AN PA CA Summary for Tux Monday 28 February 2005 Summary je e A o JB O Mail E Today Shopping 15 15 17 00 KDE Dot News Sei Y KDE 3 4 Release Candidate 1 Contacts KDE CVS Digest for February 25 2005 e No to dos pending 3 aKademy 2005 Logo Contest Launched Calendar Q3 FOSDEM 2005 Desktop Search Interview No birthdays or anniversaries pending within the To do List next 7 days u a e E 3 a No special dates pending within the next 7 days nbo inbox E z S m o 0 0 2 m a a Synchronization 2 messages 0 unread Figure 8 1 The Kontact Window Showing the Summary The subject sender and time of receipt of each message are listed in header area to the right Click a message to select it and display it in the message window Sort the messages by clicking one of the column headers subject sender date etc The contents of the currently selected message are displayed in the message frame of the window Attachments are depicted as icons at the end of the mes sage based on the MIME type of the attachment Messages can be marked with different status flags Change the status with Mes sage gt Mark Message You can use this fea
63. main menu appears in the top left corner of the screen as shown in Figure 3 7 on the next page Determine which func tionalities should be provided when your desktop starts by opening the Startup Mode dialog Each active module can be configured via the Preferences dialog Get more information about the Gnopernicus project at http www baum ro gnopernicus html 3 5 Assistive Technology Support i 1 Startup Mode 3X2 Preferences x3 Default Preferences A Preferences laa Po Y 4 Minimize B 4 1 Speech 5 Hel Ge 182 Braille a 6 About 3 Magnifier gioun ai Mouse W5 Braille Monitor 6 Command Mapping 7 Presentation 8 Screen Review amp 9 Search Figure 3 7 Configuring Gnopernicus 3 5 3 Dasher Dasher is a small application enabling you to create texts without using a key board You can use it on any computer device that comes without a keyboard handheld or wearable computers or on a normal computer that is controlled with a joystick touchpad head mouse or eyetracker instead of keyboard and mouse Dasher is driven by continuous pointer gestures Start with one character then drag the pointer to the next one until your text input is finished Dasher supports various languages out of the box English and European languages Japanese and some African languages and can easily be trained to support
64. menu support for DVDs under Go Movie streams can be fetched via the network just enter the URL at Movie gt Open Location Take screenshots with Edit gt Take Screen shot 3 4 5 Managing Archives with File Roller In GNOME manage file archives with File Roller This application is able to han dle archives of the following types tar tar gz tgz tar bz tar bz2 tar Z zip lha rar lzh ear jar and war Easily view archive SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 63 64 contents from File Roller with other applications without needing to decompress the archives File Roller supports drag and drop allowing you to drag file icons from the desktop or from the file manager Nautilus to the File Roller window and drop them there To create a new archive select Archive gt New In the next dialog specify the directory in which to create the new archive in the left window Enter the file name of the new archive in the input field below without the file extension Then determine the archive type with the drop down menu above the name field Exit the dialog with OK and return to the main view of File Roller Now add files to the archive by inserting files from the desktop or the file manager with drag and drop or by selecting Edit gt Add Files In the following dialog select one or several files keep pressed to select multiple files or directories If necessary s
65. more How can I find a specific file on my system There are two possibilities One is to use the KDE or GNOME search tool Find them in the main menu Alternatively use the command find described in man find 1 I am searching for a specific file Libfoo so 2 How do I find out what package this file is in Use the command pin Package Information to locate a file pin libfoo so 2 The above command tries to find a package or filenames and paths Use man pin 1 for more information My computer crashed Can I just press the reset button without risking any thing If your computer no longer reacts to your mouse or keyboard this does not necessarily mean that your entire system has crashed Possibly one program is blocking the mouse or the keyboard but all other programs are still running If your machine can be accessed remotely serial terminal network log in elsewhere identify the crashed application by ps or top and abort the respective program with killall program name If this does not work try killall 9 program name If this is not possible try switching to another console using to kill the faulty process from there If the computer does not respond to any of the keys and network intervention is not possible wait at least ten sec onds before pressing reset to make sure that there is no hard disk activity OVv4 XANIN ISNS To avoid possible damage to your file system make sure that all data is safely written
66. of a file to another user However only root is permitted to perform this change SUSE LINUX 284 258 Suppose the file Roadmap from Example on page 256 should no longer belong to tux but to the user geeko root should then enter chown geeko Roadmap chgrp changes the group ownership of the file However the owner of the file must be a member of the new group In this way the user tux from Ex ample 19 1 on page 255 can switch the group owning the file ProjectData to project4 with the command chgrp project4 ProjectData as long as he is a member of this new group 19 2 3 The setuid Bit In certain situations the access permissions may be too restrictive Therefore Linux has additional settings that enable the temporary change of the current user and group identity for a specific action For example the passwd program normally requires root permissions to access etc passwd This file contains some important information like the home directories of users and user and group IDs Thus a normal user would not be able to change passwd because it would be too dangerous to grant all users direct access to this file A possible solution to this problem is the setuid mechanism setuid set user ID is a special file attribute that instructs the system to execute programs marked accordingly under a specific user ID Consider the passwd command rwsr xr x 1 root shadow 80036 2004 10 02 11 08 usr bin passwd You can see the s bi
67. oo 140 8 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld o 140 8 7 ForMorelnformation le 140 9 Synchronizing a Handheld Computer with KPilot 141 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot llle 142 ada hed REESE E Eum 143 9 2 1 Configuring the Connection from within KPilot 143 9 22 Creating a dev pilotLink 144 9 3 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit 144 9 4 Managing To Do Items and Events o 145 95 Working with kon 146 9 5 1 Backing Up Data from the Handheld 146 9 52 Installing Programs on the Handheld 147 9 5 3 Synchronizing Your Address Books and Calendars 147 IHI Internet 149 151 101 TabbedBrowsing e 152 TRE 153 PCT 153 10 4 Bookmarks en 154 105 Java and JavaScript 155 Jod uud a oed BOXES Toi qe Oa E E dod aA 155 SUSE LINUX il Xiv 11 Firefox 11 1 Navigating Web Sites 11 110 TabbedBrowsing ees 11 1 2 Using the Sidebar aa 11 2 Finding Information 112 1 UsingtheSearchBar lees 1122 Using the Find Bar o o o lees 11 3 Managing Bookmarks 11 3 1 Using the Bookmark Manager 11 3 2 Migrating Bookmarks 0005 11 4 Using the Download Manager 115 Customizing Firefox 11 5 1 Extensions 1152 Changing Themes 11 5 3 Adding Smart Keywords to Your Online Searches 116 Pr
68. other lan guages Find more information about the Dasher project at http www inference phy cam ac uk dasher SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 67 68 File Edit Options Help Dasher is great Figure 3 8 Writing with Dasher 3 5 Assistive Technology Support The KDE Desktop The KDE desktop offers an intuitive graphical interface The following sections show you how to make efficient use of KDE s features and how to customize the desktop to meet your personal needs This is followed by an introduction to the file manager Konqueror and a brief description of some small but useful utilities 41 Desktop Components llle 70 H2 Seting os 5 dca II 73 43 Konqueror asa File Manager 78 44 Important Utilities 83 dopised 3g sul 70 4 1 Desktop Components The main components are the icons on the desktop and the panel at the bottom of the screen The mouse is your most important tool Click a symbol or an icon once to start the associated program or the file manager Konqueror If you right click an icon different menus appear depending on the program As well as the icons there are two desktop menus 4 1 1 The Desktop Menus If you middle click the desktop if your mouse only has two buttons press both buttons at the same time a window and desktop management menu is dis played The menu lists the various desktops and the wi
69. requires that the corresponding conduit is enabled and configured For the most part these conduits are designed to interact with specific KDE programs so in general they cannot be used with other desk top applications The time synchronization conduit is special in that there is no user visible pro gram for it It is activated in the background with each sync operation but should only be enabled on computers that use a network time server to correct their own time drift When a synchronization is started the conduits are activated one after another to carry out the data transfer There are two different sync methods a HotSync oper ation only synchronizes the data for which any conduits have been enabled while a backup operation performs a full backup of all data stored on the handheld Some conduits open a file during a sync operation which means the correspond ing program should not be running at the given time Specifically KOrganizer should not be running during a sync operation 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot The conduits used by KPilot can be enabled and configured after selecting Set tings gt Configure KPilot The following is a list of some important conduits Address Book This conduit handles the data exchange with the handheld s ad dress book The KDE counterpart for managing these contacts is KAddress Book Start it from the main menu or with the command kaddressbook KNotes Memos This conduit allows you to
70. see the prompt on the first line The prompt usually consists of the username hostname and current path but it can be customized When the cursor is after this prompt you can send com mands directly to your computer system 19 1 1 Commands A command consists of several elements The first element is always the actual command followed by parameters or options Commands are executed when you press Enter Before doing so easily edit the command line add options or correct typing errors One of the most frequently used commands is 1s which can be used with or without arguments Entering the plain 1s command in the console shows the contents of the current directory Options are prefixed with a hyphen The command 1s 1 for instance shows the contents of the same directory in full detail Next to each filename see the date when the file was created the file size in bytes and further details which are covered later One very important option that exists for many commands is help By entering 1s help display all the options for the 1s command Also use the 1s command to view the contents of other directories To do so the directory must be specified as a parameter For example to see the contents of Desktop enter 1s 1 Desktop 19 1 2 Files and Directories To use the shell efficiently it is really useful to have some knowledge of the file and directory structures of a Linux system You can think of directories as elec t
71. test and adjust the control settings for the input and output of the sound card 13 1 1 KMix KMix is the KDE mixer application It is integrated into the KDE panel as a small panel applet located in the system tray Click the panel icon to control the vol ume of your speakers with a control slider If you right click the icon the context menu of KMix appears Select Mute to switch off the sound output The panel icon then changes its appearance Clicking Mute again unmutes the volume To fine tune your sound settings select Show Mixer Window and configure Out put Input and Switches Each of the devices featured there has its own con text menu that is opened by a right clicking the device icon You can mute or hide each one of them separately 13 1 2 The GNOME Mixer Applet GMix the volume control applet for the GNOME desktop is integrated into the GNOME panel Click the panel icon to control the volume of your speakers with a simple control slider To switch off the sound output right click the icon and select Mute The volume control icon then changes its appearance To unmute the sound output right click the icon again and select Mute from the menu Se lect Open Volume Control to access the more advanced mixer features shown in Figure 13 2 on page 180 Each sound device has its own mixer tab 13 1 Mixers File Settings Help K ae WE UBL A E ae E ON xnu ui PUNOS Vo
72. the desired area with the mouse Once the settings have been made request the preview of the image to scan by clicking Preview Scan in Scan Parameters The Preview File Image Settings Help a RAE AAA Y Edad C Image Name Size Format ajal M Kooka Gallery 4items SES P kscan 0001 png 317 x 441 PNG Preview CES 317 x 442 PNG Scan Size kscan 0003 png 320 x 444 PNG Custom Iz a kscan_0004 png 352 x 422 PNG O Ki Auto Selection O active on Black v f 9 2 TX L scanner background Gallery Kooka Gallery lr Threshold RX 4 Novell Scanner Settings Canon N670U N676U LIDE20 Selection Scan mode a Color IB l Source HEN height 213 mm esolution T E fcrre A n n SEE n so Size 140 8 kB Brightness Q o E cM LES A Bee RE UE Y Contrast d lo T ht pe ge af mem dp non C Use custom gamma table Edit l Final Scan Preview Scan d Figure 17 2 The Kooka Preview Window 17 2 The Final Scan If you selected Custom for the scanning size use the mouse to select the rectan gular area to scan The selected area is confined by a dotted border 317x442 pixel 32 bit SUSE LINUX uolooddy Guiuup2gs y oyooy 229 230 Choose between color and black and white scanning and set the resolution with the slider See Figure 17 3 on the curre
73. the dialog with OK Procedure 1 6 Creating a New Desktop Icon 1 Add a new folder icon a Right click the desktop to open the context menu b Select Create New gt Folder c Enter the name of the new folder when prompted to do so d Right click the new icon and select Properties in the context menu that appears e The Properties dialog consists of four tabs General Permissions Meta Info and Share Name and icon of the folder are set via the General tab Permissions are modified via Permissions Meta Info lists size and number of items of the new folder Share can be used to configure file sharing via NFS or Samba For more information about these two protocols refer to the Administration Guide f Apply your changes and leave the dialog with OK 2 Add anew file icon a Right click the desktop for the context menu to appear b Select Create New c Choose the appropriate file type from HTML File Link to Applica tion Link to Location or Text File d Enter the name of the new file when prompted to do so e Right click the new icon and select Properties in the context menu that appears 12 13 Desktop f The Properties dialog consists of three tabs General Permissions zs and Meta Info Set the name and icon of the file in the General tab H
74. the password for the selected private key in the next step Other users can now check the signature by means of your public key 12 3 2 Trusting Keys Normally you are asked by the corresponding program whether you trust the key whether you assume it is really used by its authorized owner This happens each time a message needs to be decrypted or a signature must be checked To avoid this edit the trust level of the newly imported key Right click the newly imported key to access a small context menu for key man agement Select Edit Key in Terminal from it KGpg opens a text console in which to set the trust level with a few commands At the prompt of the text console Command enter t rust On a scale between 1 unsure and 5 complete trust make an estimate of how much you trust that the signers of the imported key have checked the true identity of the key owner Enter the selected value at the prompt Your decision If you are really sure about the signers trustworthiness enter 5 Answer the following question by entering y Finally enter quit to exit the console and return to the list of keys The key now has the trust level Ultimate The trust level of the keys in your key ring is indicated by a colored bar next to the key name The lower the trust level is the less you trust the signer of the key to have checked the true identity of the keys signed You may be entirely sure about the signer s identity but he may still be l
75. the shell can now expand the name Finally type a space then test after the expanded filename and press to execute the command 7 At this point Test file should no longer be in the directory Check this by entering 1s again 8 To see whether the file has been successfully moved change into the direc tory test with the command cd test Now enter 1s again You should see Test file in the listing Change back to your home directory at any point by entering only cd 9 To make a copy of a file use cp For instance enter cp Testfile Testbackup to copy Test file to Testbackup Once again the com mand 1s can be used to see whether both files are in the directory 19 1 4 Specifying Paths When working with files or directories it is important specify the correct path However you do not need to enter the entire absolute path from the root direc tory to the respective file You can start from the current directory Address your home directory directly with This means that there are two ways to list the file Test file in the directory test by entering the relative path with 1s test or by specifying the absolute path with 1s test To list the contents of home directories of other users enter 1s username In the above mentioned directory tree one of the sample users is tux In this case ls tux would list the contents of the home directory of tux Refer to the current directory with a dot The next higher level in the tree is r
76. they store information about how image points lines or areas are grouped together Vector images can also be scaled very easily The drawing application of OpenOffice org for example uses this format 18 2 Starting GIMP Start GIMP from the main menu Alternatively enter gimp amp in a command line 18 2 1 Initial Configuration When starting GIMP for the first time a configuration wizard opens for prepara tory configuration The default settings are acceptable for most purposes Press Continue in each dialog unless you are familiar with the settings and prefer an other setup 18 1 Graphics Formats 18 2 2 The Default Windows Three windows appear by default They can be arranged on the screen and ex cept the toolbox closed if no longer needed Closing the toolbox closes the appli cation In the default configuration GIMP saves your window layout when you exit Dialogs left open reappear when you next start the program The Toolbox The main window of GIMP shown in Figure 18 1 on the current page contains the main controls of the application Closing it exits the application At the very top the menu bar offers access to file functions extensions and help Below that find icons for the various tools Hover the mouse over an icon to display informa tion about it File Xtns Help mM ex NIPA RS SHART amp EBz2 o z 3605 E hi z m Paintbrush DS Opacity 100 0 Mode Normal Brush C
77. this chapter is focused on Writer A full description of each module is available in the online help described in Section 6 6Jon page 115 Table 6 1 The OpenOffice org Application Modules Writer Powerful word processor application Calc Spreadsheet application that includes a chart utility Draw Drawing application for creating vector graphics Math Application for generating mathematical formulas Impress Application for creating presentations Base Database application The appearance of the application varies depending on which desktop or win dow manager is used Additionally the open and save dialog formats for your desktop are used Regardless of the appearance the basic layout and functions are the same 6 1 Compatibility with Other Office Applications OpenOffice org is able to work with Microsoft Office documents spreadsheets presentations and databases They can be seamlessly opened like other files and saved back to that format Because the Microsoft formats are closed and the specifics are not available to other applications there are occasionally formatting issues If you have problems with your documents consider opening them in the original application and resaving in an open format such as RIF for text docu ments or CSV for spreadsheets To convert a number of documents such as when first switching to the appli cation select File Wizard Document Converter Choose the file format 6
78. tion partners who can use it to encrypt the files or e mail messages they send The other part of the key pair the private key is used to decrypt the encrypted contents Important M p Private Key versus Public Key The public key is intended for the public and should be distributed to all your communication partners However only you should have access to the private key Do not grant other users access to this data Important zii Start KGpg from the main menu by selecting Utilities KGpg or enter kgpg on the command line When you start the program for the first time an assistant appears to guide you through the configuration Follow the instructions up to the point where you are prompted to create a key Enter a name an e mail address and optionally a comment If you do not like the default settings provided also set the expiration time for the key the key size and the encryption algorithm used See Figure 12 1 on the next page Confirm your settings with OK The next dialog prompts you to enter a pass word twice The program then generates the key pair and displays a summary Itis a good idea to save or print a revocation certificate right away Such a certifi cate will be needed if you forget the password for your private key so need to re voke it After you confirm with OK KGpg displays its main window See Figure Zon page 168 12 2 Exporting the Public Key After generating your key pair
79. to configure and monitor any kind of network connection Network Monitor in GNOME and Wireless Network Information in KDE can be used to monitor the state of your wireless link Important E p Network Configuration The initial configuration of any network connection is made with YaST the SUSE LINUX configuration management tool Find information about this in the Administration Guide Important al Kinternet Connecting to the Internet After your network device has been configured correctly control the Internet dial up with KInternet On start up KDE loads KInternet The program checks whether an Internet connection can be established If this is possible the appli cation icon a plug automatically appears in the right part of the KDE panel De pending on the state of the network connection the panel icon changes appear ance Currently there is no connection to the Internet Pd The connection is just being established or terminated 1 9 Networking and Mobility The connection has been established Data is transmitted to or from the Internet B ww An error has occurred If a connection has already been configured with YaST use View Log to identify the reason for the error The menu can be accessed by right clicking the KInternet icon 904002 Jeu 4 The connection is not yet active but will be established as soon as a request is made Right click the KInternet panel icon to access its config
80. to disk before resetting the system This can be done using the SysReq option of the Linux kernel The kernel support for this feature must be enabled first Open the file etc sysconfig sysctl as root and set ENABLE_SYSRO to yes Use the key combination A SysRSHU to empty all data buffers safely by writing the data to disk and unmount the file system may also be labeled on some keyboards After the file system is unmounted press the reset button to reboot your system I cannot log in to my computer with telnet I always get the answer Login incorrect You are probably trying to log in as root For security reasons this is not possible via telnet by default With YaST set up a normal user account Log in with this username Then change to the user root with su It is much better and safer however to use the program ssh instead of telnet The ssh program uses encrypted secure connections Contacting SUSE I found a bug in SUSE LINUX Where should I report it First ascertain whether it is actually a bug in the program or just an error in operation or faulty configuration settings Also read the documenta tion in usr share doc packages and usr share doc howto The bug may already have been discovered Check in the support SUSE LINUX _______ 277 278 database at http portal suse com sdb en index html Enter a keyword or work your way forward or backward via the History link If it really is a bug send a descri
81. to enable or disable these two languages This can even be done in a domain specific way which means that you can permit access for some hosts and block access for others Java and JavaScript are often disabled for security reasons Unfortunately some Web pages require JavaScript for correct display 10 6 For More Information For any questions or problems that arise when working with Konqueror refer to the application s handbook which is available from the Help menu Konqueror also has a Web page located at http www konqueror org SUSE LINUX JOJONDOUOY JOSMOIG q M SUL 155 Firefox Included with your SUSE LINUX is the Mozilla Firefox Web browser With fea tures like tabs pop up window blocking and download and image management Firefox combines the latest Web technologies View more than one Web page in a single window Suppress annoying advertisements and disable images that only slow you down Its easy access to different search engines helps you find the in formation you need Start the program from the main menu or by entering the command firefox The main program features are described in the following sections Tm 158 vn 159 Tur 160 VM ENS 160 cnp vcr 161 11 6 Printing from Firefox lees 164 11 7 ForMorelnformation leen 164 XOJ9JIJ 158 11 1 Navigating Web Sites Firefox has much the same look and feel as other browsers It is shown in Figure IT on this page The n
82. to hold for moving an application window When several application windows populate the desktop the active one by de fault is the one last clicked Change this behavior by activating Select windows when the mouse moves over them If desired activate Raise selected window after an interval and adjust the latency time with the slider This activates a win dow only when the cursor was placed within the window for a time exceeding the set latency Application windows can be rolled up by double clicking the title bar leaving only the title bar visible This saves space on the desktop and is the default be havior It is alternatively possible to set windows to maximize when the title bar is double clicked With the radio buttons select the modifier key to press for moving a window The possible choices are Ctr Alf and the key 3 2 5 Background Determine a background for your desktop By default the changes made here are applied to all virtual desktops If you do not want any background picture click No Wallpaper and define a background style The drop down menu offers a horizontal gradient a vertical gradient or no gradient at all Use Desktop Col ors to define the desired colors in the color editor To use an image file as a background picture drag it from the file manager and drop it in the Desktop Wallpaper window Alternatively click Add Wallpaper to open a dialog in which to select the desir
83. to install the gtkam package The other required packages are selected automatically Digikam is included in the default installation If it is not installed use YaST to install it if desired 16 4 Using Konqueror KDE users can easily access digital cameras by means of the familiar Konqueror interface Connect your camera to the USB port A camera icon should appear on the desktop Click this icon to open the camera in Konqueror The camera can also be accessed by entering the URL camera in Konqueror Navigate through the camera s directory structure until the files are shown Use the usual Kon queror file management features to copy the files as desired More information about using Konqueror is available in Chapter 10 on page 151 SUSE LINUX xnur PUD SOIOLUDD JOLIBIG 217 218 16 5 Using gtKam gtKam is a graphical interface for downloading and deleting pictures from a dig ital camera To adjust or edit your pictures use GIMP as described in Chapter 18 on pagep35 Connect your camera to the appropriate port and turn on the camera Start gtKam with the command ot kam amp From the menu select Camera Select Camera In the dialog that opens select the camera model or use Detect Select the appropriate port if the detection fails The main gtKam window is divided into three sections the menu and toolbars the left pane with index settings and camera and directory selection and the right pane for disp
84. to your system A digital camera appears in this list as does a USB flash or hard drive Your Network Use the Places menu in the top GNOME panel to access net work folders In KDE click the Network Browsing desktop icon to gather all services provided in your network Use this functionality to access avail able network shares and Windows networks FIP servers or any other ser vice type that has been registered for your network 1 4 3 Searching Files If you need to search for certain file across the whole system use the graphical search applications provided by your desktop environment In GNOME select Places gt Search for Files to launch the search tool The first dialog prompts you for the name or at least a part of the name of the file Specify the directory to search for the file If you know for sure the file should be located in your home directory accept the home username path that has automatically been se lected To launch a search on the entire file system select the file system root by 1 4 File Management entering Refine your search by adding more search criteria Click Show more options and select any of the criteria offered there It is even possible to use reg H ular expressions or wild cards As soon as you enter all data hit Find to launch a the search and see the result in the bottom part of the window Depending on the scope of your search the whole process may tak
85. transfer notes created with KNotes to the handheld s memo application Start the KDE application from the main menu or with the command knotes 9 1 Conduits Used by KPilot Calendar KOrganizer This conduit is responsible for syncing the appoint ments events of the hendheld The desktop equivalent is KOrganizer ToDos KOrganizer This conduit is responsible for syncing to do items The desktop counterpart is KOrganizer Time Synchronization Conduit Enabling this conduit adjusts the handheld s clock to that of the desktop computer during each sync operation This is only a good idea if the clock of the desktop computer itself is corrected by a time server at fairly frequent intervals Available Conduits Available conduits are on Active Conduits KDE Addressbook Conduit EE Ko Calendar Conduit are on the right Only rganzer Calendar Congu active conduits can be KOrganizer Todo Conduit configured KPilot Expenses Conduit KPilot KNotes Conduit Time Synchronization Conduit Figure 9 1 Configuration Dialog with the Available Conduits 9 2 Configuring the Handheld Connection To be able to use KPilot first set up the connection with the handheld computer The configuration depends on the type of cradle docking unit used with the handheld There are two types of these USB cradles or cables and serial cradles or cables 9 2 1 Configuring the Connection from within KPilot The easiest way to set up the connecti
86. with a corresponding password This differentiation of users guarantees that unauthorized users cannot see files for which they do not have permission Larger changes to the system such as installing new programs are also usually impossible or restricted for normal users Only the root user or super user has the unrestricted capacity to make changes to the system and has unlimited access to all files Those who use this concept wisely only logging in with full root access when necessary can cut back the risk of unintentional loss of data Because under normal circumstances only root can delete system files or format hard disks the threat from the Trojan horse effect or from accidentally entering destructive com mands can be significantly reduced lleus eut ut 8uptoM 19 2 1 File System Permissions Basically every file in a Linux file system belongs to a user and a group Both of these proprietary groups and all others can be authorized to write read or exe cute these files A group in this case can be defined as a set of connected users with certain col lective rights For example call a group working on a certain project project3 Every user in a Linux system is a member of at least one proprietary group nor mally users There can be as many groups in a system as needed but only root is able to add groups Every user can find out with the command groups of which groups he is a member File Access The organization of permiss
87. 1 Compatibility with Other Office Applications from which to convert There are several StarOffice and Microsoft Office formats available After selecting a format click Next then specify where OpenOffice org should look for templates and documents to convert and in which directory the converted files should be placed Before continuing make sure that all other set tings are appropriate Click Next to see a summary of the actions to perform which gives another opportunity to check whether all settings are correct Finally start the conversion by clicking Convert Important Finding Windows Files Documents from a Windows partition are usually in a subdirectory of windows Important _ When sharing documents with others you have several options If the recipient only needs to read the document export it to a PDF file with File gt Export as PDF PDF files can be read on any platform using a viewer like Adobe Acrobat Reader To share a document for editing use one of the regular document for mats The default formats comply with the OASIS standard XML format making them compatible with a number of applications TXT and RTF formats although limited in formatting might be a good option for text documents CSV is useful for spreadsheets OpenOffice org might also offer your recipient s preferred for mat especially Microsoft formats OpenOffice org is available for a number of operating systems Th
88. 18 3 Getting Started in GIMP 18 Printing Images 18 6 For More Information SUSE LINUX xvii xviii 19 1 8 Archives and DataCompression 19 1 9 mtools 19 1 10 Cleaning Un 19 2 Users and AccessPermissions 19 21 File System Permissions o ooo 19 2 2 Modifying FilePermissions 19 2 3 The setuid Bit 19 24 Thesetgid Bit 19 25 The Sticky Bit 19 2 6 Access Control Lists 19 3 Important Linux Commands 19 3 1 FileCommandsl 19 3 2 System Commands 19 4 TheviFditor A SUSELINUXFAQ Contents Part Introducing Linux First Contact This chapter guides you through the first encounter with your freshly installed Linux system Learn all about the different components of your system envi ronment After this crash course you should be fit to use and enjoy your SUSE LINUX system 11 LogginglnandOut llle 4 12 The User Concept of Linux esses 6 T3 Desktops sx suse ope d eI eS e 7 14 File Management 15 15 Appliation ooo mo 17 62 Printnp s um aar e oe bb east mde fere diane x 18 17 BasicAdministrativeTasks 22 HO SECUN s ianuae cec Exe e m RU ci is A 23 19 Networking and Mobility 24 110 UsingtheShell lle 29 1904002 Sil This chapter focuses on the installed system It does not cover questions rega
89. 2 Antarctica Lizard Geeko C Mail E mai geeko example com geekoathome example com 3 Contacts work zi Phone 777 777 777 e personal wus Phor 777 7777 778 Add 1 Mascot Drive E Exchange Linux Town 7482 y Figure 7 2 The Evolution Address Book 7 4 1 Adding Contacts Along with the name and e mail address Evolution can store other address and contact information about a person The e mail address of a sender can quickly be added by right clicking the marked address in the message preview To enter a completely new contact click New Contact in the Contacts view Both methods open a dialog in which to enter contact information In the Contact tab enter the contact s name e mail addresses telephone num bers and instant messaging identities Personal Information is for Web ad dresses and other detailed information Enter the contact s other address informa tion in Mailing Address After entering all desired details for the contact click OK to add it to the address book 7 4 Contacts 7 4 2 Making a List If you frequently send e mail messages to a group of people make this easier by creating a list Click File gt New gt Contact List The contact list editor opens Enter a name for the list Add addresses by typing the address in the box and clicking Add or by dragging contacts from the Contacts view and dropping them in the box Toggle Hide
90. 26 M Warning Cost Control Note that DoD only makes sense if you have a flat rate Internet ac count If that is not the case connecting and disconnecting all the time can become very costly Warning If you intend to use a wireless network card as your connection to the Internet configure it using YaST as described in the Administration Guide and make sure that the device activation in YaST is set to User Controlled As soon as the inter face is configured you can use KInternet to control your wireless network con nection just as you would for normal network interfaces To access the WLAN functionality of KInternet right click the icon to open the menu Select Wireless Connection and a window showing two tabs opens First scan for suitable wireless networks you could connect to Select the tab Scan for Wireless Networks shown in Figure 1 7 on this page Current connection Scan for Wireless Networks Name ESSID Signal Bitrate WEP mac address Freq 2 AP_1 AP2 4 I 4 rm Start YaST connect Accoustic Scan auto refresh Refresh Start Scan OK Close EI Figure 1 7 KInternet Scanning for Wireless Networks Start the scan with Start Scan For KInternet to continuously scan the network environment also select Auto Refresh Acoustic feedback for each connection found can be activated via Acoustic Scan Any connection found is displayed in the list window Select on
91. 5 m c o 0 files selected 2 files 150 B CH Figure 4 4 Ark File Archive Preview To create a new archive select File New Enter the name of the new archive in the dialog that opens and specify the format using Filter After confirming with Save or by pressing Enter Ark opens an empty window You can drag and drop files and directories from the file manager into this window As the fi nal step Ark compresses everything into the previously selected archive format For more information about Ark select Help gt Ark Handbook 4 4 6 Screenshots with KSnapshot With KSnapshot create snapshots of your screen or individual application win dows Start the program from the main menu or from the command line with the command ksnapshot The dialog window of KSnapshot shown in Figure 4 5 on the following page consists of two parts The upper area contains a preview of the current screen and three buttons for creating and saving the screenshots In the lower part of the window set some options to decide how the screenshot should be created To take a screenshot use Snapshot delay to determine the period in seconds to wait between when New Snapshot is clicked and the actual creation of the screenshot If Only grab the window containing the pointer is active only the window currently under the pointer is photographed By default the pro gram creates a shot of the entire sc
92. D device is detected automatically Do not change this default setting unless the au todetection failed and you need to set the CD device manually Error correction and encoder priority can also be set here The tab Ogg Vorbis Encoder deter mines the quality of the encoding To configure online lookup of album track and artist information for your ripped audio data select Add Track Information Start the ripping process by inserting the CD into the CD ROM drive and enter audiocd at the Location bar Konqueror then lists the tracks of the CD and some folders see Figure on the next page To keep uncompressed audio data on your disk just select the wav files and drag them into another Konqueror window to copy them over to their final desti nation To start the Ogg Vorbis encoding drag the OggVorbis folder to another Konqueror window The encoding starts as soon as you drop the Ogg Vorbis folder to its destination SUSE LINUX Io 192 audiocd Konqueror gt Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help eaca0 0 amp amp JE x E Location E3 audiocd EE FLAC Full CD Information Ogg Vorbis lila downs 01 mi cora e E E 6 of 48 5 MB Copying lila downs lila downs i Source 02 elfeo w 03 sale so P 7 A Destination file home tux Mu z n me recuerda ogg ei J B 6 lila downs lila downs i 3 2 MB of 48 5 MB complete 1 15 files 08 la
93. Dia Draw Freehand SVG Editing WebDraw Freehand Inkscape Dia Adobe Illustrator Creating 3D 3D Studio MAX Maya POV Ray Blender Graphics POV Ray Blender Managing Digi Software provided by the Digikam gThumb tal Photographs camera manufaturer Scanning Vuescan Vuescan Kooka The GIMP Image Viewing ACDSee gwenview Inkscape Inkscape is a free SVG editor Users of Adobe Illustrator Corel Draw Dia and Visio can find a similar range of features and a familiar user interface in Inkscape Among its features find SVG to PNG export layering trans forms gradients grouping of objects and more Find more information about Inkscape at http www inkscape org Dia is a Linux application aiming to be the Linux equivalent of Visio It sup ports many types of special diagrams such as network or UML charts Ex port formats include SVG PNG and EPS To support your own custom made diagram types provide the new shapes in a special XML format Find more information about Dia at http www gnome org projects dia The GIMP The GIMP is the Open Source alternative to Adobe Photoshop Its feature list rivals that of Photoshop so it is well suited for professional image manipulation There is even a Windows version of GIMP available Find more information at http www gimp org or refer to Chapter 18 on page 235 SUSE LINUX SIOMIJOS XNU OUM OL BUIHSS NO 4 42 POV Ray The Persistence of Vision Raytracer creates t
94. I Location Konqueror Homepage Sitemap Help Contact Us Konqueror Web Browser File Manager ue and more A mmi Konqueror is the file manager forthe K Embedded Desktop Environment It supports basic file KDE Family management on local UNIX filesystems from simple cut copy and paste operations to advanced remote and local network file Information Konqueror FAQ browsing e KBENews Java HOWTO Konqueror is the canvas for all the latest KDE KDE Events CSS Support technology from KIO slaves which provide KDE Myths E mechanisms for file access to component J embedding via the KParts object interface and m itis one ofthe most customizable applications KDE Y HP Proiects La Figure 10 1 The Browser Window of Konqueror 10 1 Tabbed Browsing If you often use more than one Web page at a time tabbed browsing may make it easier to switch between them Load Web sites in separate tabs within one win dow The advantage is that you keep more control over your desktop because you only have one main window After logout the KDE session management 10 1 Tabbed Browsing allows for saving your Web session in Konqueror The next time you log in Kon queror loads the exact URLs visited last time To open a new tab select Window gt New Tab or press Ct Sp CN To change the behavior of tabs go to Settings gt Configure Ko
95. ISP or system administrator Create outgoing mail boxes under the Sending tab by clicking Add Choose between the server types SMTP and sendmail SMTP is the right choice in most cases After making this selection a window appears in which to enter SMTP server data Provide a name and enter the server address as given to you by your ISP If the server wants you to authenticate yourself enable Server requires au thentication Security settings are under the Security tab Specify your preferred encryption method here Make settings for receiving e mail under the Receiving tab Use Add to create a new account Choose between different methods for fetching mail such as local Mbox or Maildir format POP3 or IMAP Make the settings appropriate for your server 8 3 2 Creating Messages To compose new messages select Message gt New Message or click the corre sponding icon in the toolbar To send messages from different e mail accounts se lect one of the identities as described in Section B 3 1 on page 132 In the recipient fields enter an e mail address or part of a name or address in your address book If Kontact can match what you enter to something in the address book a selection list opens Click the desired contact or complete your input if none matches To select directly from the address book click To attach files to your message click the paper clip icon and select the file to at ta
96. JOS SU OUM OL Buieo NO 33 34 PostgreSQL PostgreSQL is an object relational database management system that supports an extended subset of the SOL standard including trans actions foreign keys subqueries triggers and user defined types and functions Find more information about PostgreSQL at http www postgresql org GnuCash GnuCash is a software tool to control both your personal and busi ness finances Keep track of income and expenses and manage your bank accounts and stock portfolios all using one piece of software Learn more about GnuCash at http www gnucash org moneyplex moneyplex is a tool to control your finances All tasks from manag ing incoming resources and expenses and monitoring your stock portfolio to online transactions via the HBCI standard are handled by moneyplex Keep track of your financial transactions over time using various analysis options Because this tool is also available for Windows users can migrate very easily without having to learn a whole new application interface More information about moneyplex can be found at http www matrica de Planner Planner is a project management tool aiming to provide functional ity similar to the project management tools used under Windows Among its various features are Gantt charting abilities different kinds of views on tasks and resources and much more Find more information about Planner athttp www imendio com projects planner Taskjuggler T
97. K XMMS Player Video Player Winamp Windows Media Kaffeine MPlayer Xine Player XMMS Audio Editor SoundForge Cooledit Audacity Audacity Sound Mixer sndvol32 alsamixer Kamix Music Notation Video Creator and Editor TV Viewer Finale SmartScore Sibelius Windows Movie Maker Adobe Premiere Media Studio Pro MainActor AVerTV PowerVCR 3 0 CinePlayer DVR Noteedit LilyPond Rosegarden MainActor Kino xawtv analog motv ana log xawtv4 tvtime kdetv zapping KsCD KsCD is a neat little CD player application for the KDE desktop Its user interface very much resembles that of a normal hardware CD player guaranteeing ease of use KsCD supports CDDB enabling you to get any track and album information either from the Internet or your local file system Find more information at http docs kde org en 3 3 kdemultimedia kscd Grip Grip provides CD player and ripper functionalities for the GNOME desk top It supports CDDB lookups for track and album data Ripping can be done using the built in cdparanoia capabilities or via external rippers Find more information at http www nostatic org grip 38 28 Multimedia K3b K3b is a multitalented media creation tool Create data audio or video CD and DVD projects by dragging and dropping Find more information about K3b at http www k3b org or refer to Chapter I5 on page Kaffeine Kaffeine is a versatile multimedia application supporting a wide range of a
98. KMail for the first time the program creates several folders inbox is where new messages fetched from a server are initially placed outbox is used for temporary storage of messages queued for sending sent mail is for copies of messages sent t rash contains copies of all e mails deleted with De or Edit Delete Use drafts to save unfinished messages If you are using IMAP the IMAP folders are listed below the local folders If you want additional folders to organize your messages create them by select ing Folder New Folder This opens a window in which to specify name and format of the newly created folder Right click the folder for a context menu offering several folder operations Click Expiry to specify the expiration date for read and unread messages and what should happen with them after expiration If you intend to use the folder to store messages from a mailing list set the necessary options under Folder gt Mailing List Management To move one or several messages from one folder to another highlight the mes sages to move then press M or select Message Move to In the list of folders that appears select the folder to which to move your messages Messages can also be moved by dragging them from the upper window and dropping them into the appropriate folder in the left window 8 3 5 Filters Filters are a convenient method of automatically processing incoming mail They
99. Kopete Kopete is an online messenger application allowing multiple partners connected to the Internet to chat with each other Kopete currently supports all common messenger protocols such as ICO MSN Yahoo SMS Jabber and IRC Configuring Kopete Configure Kopete by entering your personal user data Click Settings gt Con figure Kopete Connections shows all currently available protocols Check the desired connection type to activate it With Accounts enter your user data You must register with a provider offer ing instant messaging services before using such service Click New to open a configuration assistant that can assist you in completing your user profile The next step lists the available messaging services Select the service with which you have registered and click Continue Then enter the user data received upon registration with the messaging service This usually consists of the nickname or e mail address and a password Complete the configuration of the messenger account by clicking Finish Here You Can Manage All Your Accounts Protocol Account New GroupWise j Ki inc SUSE IRC doptseq 3d eut X Cancel lo A Q Help iv Figure 4 6 Kopete Configuration Panels The next item in the configuration dialog is Appearance It influences how Kopete is displayed Emoticons provides a selection of various types of smileys Use Chat window and Col
100. Netscape Opera and Internet Explorer Run Command This menu item opens a window in which to enter a command manually Execute the command by pressing Enter Undo Use this item to undo the last action For example if you have just cre ated a new directory on the desktop clicking this item reverts the creation so the directory disappears doptseq 3d eut Paste To keep a folder or document handy on the desktop you can copy an icon from the file manager by right clicking and selecting Copy then mov ing the mouse to the desired location on the desktop Right click again and select Paste The icon is now available on your desktop and can be moved around by dragging it with the left mouse button pressed Icons This allows you to rearrange the icons on the desktop You can also change the order of the icons Windows This arranges the windows on the desktop either on top of each other beginning from the top left corner or next to each other Refresh Desktop If the desktop appears garbled in some way use this menu item to redraw it Configure Desktop This menu item starts a configuration dialog with which to configure the appearance and behavior of the desktop Details about the configuration of the desktop are provided in Section 4 2Jon page 3 Start New Session This menu opens a dialog box asking if you want to start a new user environment After clicking Start New Session
101. OS EE nv lll RT ag Project rate 44100 Cursor 0 00 000000 min sec Snap To Off Figure 13 10 Spectral View of the Audio Data To import audio files select Project Import Audio The program supports the WAV format and the compressed Ogg Vorbis format See Section 13 3 3 on page 189 for more information about this format 13 4 2 Editing Audio Files Open the AudioTrack menu to the left of the track This menu offers various op tions for different views and basic editing operations To rename the track select Name and enter a new name The different view modes offered by Audacity include Waveform Waveform dB Spectrum and Pitch Choose the one suiting your needs If you want to edit each channel of a stereo track separately select Split Track Each channel can then be treated as a separate track Set Sam ple Format in bit and Sample Rate in Hz for each track Before you can use most of the tools offered in the Edit menu first select the channel and the segment of the track to edit After making your selection you can apply all kinds of modifications and effects to it SUSE LINUX 193 194 Depending on the chosen file type various view formats for segment selections are offered under View Set Selection Format With Set Snap To Mode the segment boundaries can automatically be adapted t
102. TEE 135 Evolution eo etentese th rere ere SODCOUDIS serc konie s rade she E E RpE 120 address books attachments calendar susuusus contacts os dersinde sainia eua creating messages encryption cece eee eee eee Exchange A Re ee folders Groupwise oooccccooccccoroco importing mail PDAS and 0 eee cece eens signing starting tasks F FAQ file managers Konqueror 6 cece eee INautil cevecchee sre tne files archivin B oce eee de Deg associations suse 5 comparing sees ara iiae eee compressing suse converting from Microsoft formats copying deleting encrypti exe finding formats GIF shell uncomp viewing Windows find Firefox DB casas ene tie dee EE e searching contents ssss searching for ressing ainena eee eee ee TT 1571164 bookmarks ssssesssss 160 mana migrating oocococcoccccorcncos configuring esses download manager extensio finding on page ss navigating 0 eee eee eee printing BINS rr ves dee es A m SUSE LINUX 281 searching with 159 1163 AAA eren res 159 A mete peribus 157 SE 159 GIMP eeg
103. The Desktop Menu The Desktop menu contains the basic controls for managing your desktop Here find Lock Screen and Log Out as well as an easy to use function for taking screenshots of your desktop The screenshot function can alternatively be ac cessed just by pressing the key also known as PrtSc Applets Applets are little applications that are nested in the panel by means of a small icon Unlike a real application they do not have their own window on screen Some applets are already preconfigured to be in your panel on first start but there are many more to be discovered and added to your own custom panel Adding a panel applet is very simple Just right click the panel to open the Add to Panel dialog shown in FigureB 1 on the current page scroll down until you find what you need select the item and click Add A new applet is then perma nently added to the panel Select an item to add to the panel Custom Application Launcher Create a new launcher Application Launcher Launch a program that is already in the GNOME menu Battery Charge Monitor Monitor a laptop s remaining power Character Palette Insert characters Clock Get the current time and date Command Line Mini Commander emeng CPU Frequency Scaling Monitor Monitor the CPU Frequency Scaling 5 Help Back X Cancel 7 dp Add Figure 3 1 Adding a New Icon to the Panel SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 51 52 3 2
104. UOD 45114 Welcome to portia Username Password Figure 1 2 A KDM Login Screen Session Type Determine the session type Make changes only if you want to use a session type other than the default KDE Future sessions are automati cally of the same type unless you change the session type manually Menu Remote Login enables you to log in on a remote machine Shutdown either turns the computer off completely or reboots the system To terminate the session choose Logout from the main menu Then determine whether to end your session and leave the system running or restart or shut down on logout If your system provides power management you are offered to suspend the computer making the next system start much faster than a complete boot 1 2 The User Concept of Linux Linux distinguishes between ordinary users and a superuser The superuser called root takes care of all kinds of administrative tasks and has access to all 1 2 The User Concept of Linux parts of the system Normal users lack these privileges All users including the superuser have their own home directories where all pri vate data like documents bookmarks or e mail are stored Write access to these home directories is strictly limited to their respective owners Folders in a home directory holding sensitive data can also be protected against read access by other users System directories holding central configuration files or executabl
105. X JOJIdM ULM anduon PJOSYPUDH D Burziuoiu2uAS 147 Part Ill Internet The Web Browser Konqueror Konqueror is not only a versatile file manager It is also a modern Web browser If you start the browser with the icon in the panel Konqueror opens with the Web browser profile As a browser Konqueror offers tabbed browsing the possibility of saving Web pages with graphics Internet keywords bookmarks and support for Java and JavaScript 101 TabbedBrowsing a 152 Sede e Ota Bawa amp 153 103 Internet Kevword o oo 153 104 Bookmarks 154 105 Javaand JavaScript oo oo 155 10 6 bor More Information 155 JOJONOUOY JOSMOIG q M SUL 152 Start Konqueror from the main menu or by entering the command konqueror To load a Web page enter its address in the location bar for example http www suse com Konqueror now tries to reach the address and display the page Entering the protocol at the beginning of the address http in this case is not strictly required The program is able to complete the address automati cally but this only works reliably with Web addresses For an FIP address al ways enter ftp at the beginning of the input field Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help QBQWQ WOGeBSRARAS de E gt Location ak http konqueror kde org y Gl all 3K Konqueror Homepage S
106. a table picture or chart 6 2 1 Selecting Text To select text click the desired beginning of the selection and keeping the mouse button pressed move the cursor towards the end of the range which can be char acters lines or entire paragraphs Release the button when all desired text is se lected While selected text is displayed in inverted colors Open a context menu by right clicking the selection Use the context menu to change the font the font style and other text properties Selected text can be cut or copied to the clipboard Cut or copied text can be pasted back into the document at another location Use the context menu Edit or the relevant toolbar icons to access these functions 112 6 Word Processing with Writer Steps Specify the sender and recipient information 1 Page design Sender s address e Use user data for return address 3 Printed items New sender address 4 Recipient and sender 5 Footer 6 Name and location Recipient s address Use placeholders for recipient s address Use address database for mail merge Help lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel Figure 6 2 An OpenOffice org Wizard 6 2 2 Navigating in Large Documents The Navigator displays information about the contents of a document It also en ables you to jump quickly to the different elements included For example use the Navigator to get a quick overview of all the chapters or to see a list of the im ages inc
107. abilitatspakts Kobe Gedenken an Erdbebenopfer Fliege Die Talkshow Tagesschau 110 112 Wetter 170 Gesellschaft Sport 200 600 Lotto Toto Das Erste 300 400 Wirtschaft Internet www ard text de Ubersicht UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA AL Figure 14 4 The mtt4 Video Text Browser 14 6 Webcam Operation with gqcam gqcam is a webcam application that assists in taking snapshots or automatic pic ture series with webcams To use gqcam your webcam must be supported by Video4Linux Many USB webcams like the Logitech Quickcam Express are au tomatically recognized Grayscale and color cameras can be used TV cards that support Video4Linux can also be used as an image source An overview of the supported USB devices is maintained at http www linux usb org A graphical user interface is not compulsory because gqcam can also run from the command line SUSE LINUX ________ 205 206 P dvbradio S File Stations Commands Frontend locked Figure 14 5 DVB Radio 14 6 1 Operation Connect your camera to the USB port of your computer before starting gqcam Then run gqcam The current picture of your webcam is automatically shown in the upper part of the application window The lower part has sliders for adjusting the brightness white balance contrast tint and color saturation as needed The brightness is automatically preset This feature can be set in General in File Preferenc
108. access type group accepts the following characters u user g group o others For access grant access with and deny it with The access type is controlled by the following options r read w write x execute executing files or changing to the directory 19 3 Important Linux Commands s Set uid bit the application or program is started as if it were started by the owner of the file As an alternative a numeric code can be used The four digits of this code are composed of the sum of the values 4 2 and 1 the decimal result of a binary mask The first digit sets the set user ID SUID 4 the set group ID 2 and the sticky 1 flags The second digit defines the permissions of the owner of the file The third digit defines the permissions of the group members and the last digit sets the permissions for all other users The read permission is set with 4 the write permission with 2 and the permission for executing a file is set with 1 The owner of a file would usually receive a 6 or a 7 for executable files gzip parameters file s This program compresses the contents of files using complex mathematical algorithms Files compressed in this way are given the extension gz and need to be uncompressed before they can be used To compress several files or even entire directories use the tar com mand IOUS eut UM 8uptoM d Decompresses the packed gzip files so they return to their original size and can be processe
109. addresses to select whether the recipients can see who else has received the mail Click OK when finished The list is now one of your contacts and appears in the composition window after the first few letters are typed 7 4 3 Adding Address Books Configure additional GroupWise and Exchange address books in the account configuration for that account To add additional local or LDAP books select File gt New gt Address Book In the dialog that opens select the type and enter the required information 7 5 Calendars Evolution can work with multiple calendars With File Import import cal endars in iCalendar format Use the calendar to enter appointments and schedule meetings with others If desired be reminded of your plans 7 5 Adding Appointments To add a new appointment to your calendar click File New gt Appoint ment Under the Appointment tab enter the details for the appointment Se lect a category if desired to ease searching and sorting later Optionally set for Evolution to provide a reminder before your appointment under Alarm If the appointment occurs regularly set that under Recurrence Click OK after all set tings are made The new appointment is then shown in your calendar 7 5 2 Scheduling a Meeting To schedule a meeting with other people select File New gt Meeting Enter information as for an appointmen
110. ags Name Type Path E Test Plain Text Document home tux Documents test v Print system currently used CUPS Common UNIX Print System Y Server localhost 631 X Keep this dialog open after printing Options lt lt 7 System Options Help x Print 3 Cancel Figure 1 5 Filing a Print Job with KPrinter Start KJobViewer from the main menu or with the command k jobviewer from the command line A window like that in Figure 1 6 on the next page opens list ing all the print jobs queued on your printer As long as your print job is not ac tive you can edit it Do this using the entries of the Jobs menu If for example you want to check if you sent the correct document to the printer you can stop the job and resume it if you decide to print it Remove your own print jobs from the queue with Remove To change the printer select a different printer with Move to Printer With Restart reprint a document To do this select Filter Toggle Completed Jobs select the desired document and click Jobs Restart Clicking Jobs Job IPP Report reveals the technical details of a job Use Jobs Increase Prior ity and Jobs gt Decrease Priority to set the priority depending on how quickly 1 6 Printing File Jobs Filter Settings Help Dem EX 1 AO Ti Co sei tux mozilla ps Completed 2341 1 O y4 tux mozilla ps
111. also some that communicate with a proprietary protocol which can complicate the tasks If your camera does not support USB mass storage or PTP the following descrip tions will not work Try gphoto2 list cameras and the information at http www gphoto org 216 16 1 Connecting to the Camera If your camera can be switched to a USB mass storage device select this option After you connect it with the USB port of your computer and turn it on it is de tected by the hotplug system This takes care of mounting the device automati cally so it is easily accessible The KDE desktop shows a camera icon after a suc cessful mount After the camera is successfully mounted see a new directory under media be ginning with usb and lots of numbers Each vendor and product has a number so when you connect a device on your computer it has always the same name Depending on what you have connected to the USB bus find different entries The only problem left is to find the correct entry for your camera Try to list one of these directories and see what happens Each camera has a different tree struc ture so there is no general rule If you can see JPEG files in a directory you prob ably found it After you find your correct directory you can copy move or delete the files of your camera with a file manager like Konqueror or simple shell commands see Section on page 260 and the Administration Guide 16 3 Installing the Programs Use YaST
112. an show you a preview of certain files Normally this is switched on if you browse in a directory It only works if your icon view is activated look into View gt View Mode The preview function can simplify your daily work In big directories it gives a rough overview of what is inside the files Sometimes this is not useful for example for packed files But if you point to the respective file Konqueror opens a tool tip with additional information like name owner and size You can change which files have a preview Go to Settings gt Configure Kon queror and open the section Previews amp Meta Data Konqueror differentiates between Internet and local protocols Each protocol can be activated Approve with Ok 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Location Edit View Go Bookmarks Tools Settings Window Help aaO CO ionem E gt Location E3 file Mome tux E3 suse e X za FTP Archives Ara H Local Network 3r 7 99 web Sites gt i KDE Applications del KDE Home Page bin Desktop Mail OpenOffice org1 1 QJ KDE News GsusE 1 orbit tux public html Novell Fonts sxw Welcome txt x o E v Z ES a 8 tems 2 Files 7 2 KB Total 6 Folders Figure 4 1 The File Manager Konqueror 4 3 2 File Associations A modern desktop system should know how to handle its file types With Kon queror decide which application can be used to process a file Go to Settin
113. and usr X11R6 bin How can I recognize executable files The command 1s 1 returns all executable files in the directory usr bin in green Also recognize them by the x in the first column rwWXr xr x 1 root root 64412 Jul 23 15 23 usr bin ftp How do I start a service or an application at boot To start certain services at boot use the YaST module System Services Runlevel Find a detailed description of this module and some back ground information about the boot and runlevel concept of Linux in the Administration Guide To configure GNOME to start any application automatically when it starts open the GNOME Control Center and choose System Sessions Open the tab named Startup Programs and enter the application you want started In KDE start Konqueror and open the folder kde Autostart in your home directory Drag the application icon from the main menu into the Konqueror window and choose Link Here The application will be started the next time you log in to KDE SUSE LINUX 273 274 I only have an application in source code How can I install it Before trying to compile an application on your own check whether it already exist as installable RPM Try Web sites like http packman links2linux org orhttp rpmfind net Decompress the archive with tar xvzf name tar gz read the INSTALL or README files and follow the instructions If compiling on your own note that neither the compila
114. applications are listed Test a sound by first selecting the corresponding notice in the Event column then clicking Play Change the sound by clicking Event then Browse The dialog that appears provides a list of files from which to choose Close it with OK In the System Bell tab determine whether an audible bell should be activated for all kinds of system events and whether to have visual feedback as well Visual feedback could consist of a flashing window title bar or the entire screen flashing 3 2 12 Default Applications To improve the interoperability of your GNOME desktop configure the default Web browser mail reader and terminal applications that should be launched whenever another GNOME application needs these functionalities Select the ap plication s name and customize its command if necessary If you for example set 3 2 Settings your default browser to Firefox this application is started when you click a link in an e mail These settings only apply to GNOME applications however 3 2 13 Sessions The Sessions dialog enables you to control the behavior of your desktop right from the login In the Session Options tab determine whether you want to see the GNOME splash screen while the desktop is loading after login If Prompt on logout is checked a confirmation dialog appears at the end of a session ask ing you to confirm the logout action Check Automatically save chang
115. are apps korganizer select a file that can be used as a calendar file by KOrganizer In this example this is the file palm ics In the case of a user called tux the complete path and filename would be home tux kde share apps korganizer palm ics as shown in Figure 9 3 on the next page KOrganizer should not be running when data is being exchanged with the hand held Otherwise KPilot fails to carry out the sync operation SUSE LINUX JOJIdM ULM anduon pjeupupoH D Burziuoiu2uAS 145 146 ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file home tux kde share apps korganiz er palm ics Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only Sync archived entries to the PC XL Cancel Figure 9 3 Dialog Showing the Path to a KOrganizer Calendar File 9 5 Working with KPilot Synchronizing the data of KDE applications with those of the handheld computer is quite easy Simply start KPilot then press the HotSync button on the cradle or cable to initiate the sync operation 9 5 1 Backing Up Data from the Handheld To do a full backup select File gt Backup The backup is performed during the next sync operation After that switch back by selecting File gt HotSync from the menu Otherwise the time consuming full backup wi
116. art keyword to simplify this task SUSE LINUX ________ 163 164 1 Gotohttp en wikipedia org 2 After Firefox displays the Web page see the search text field Right click it then choose Add a Keyword for this Search from the menu that opens 3 The Add Bookmark dialog appears In Name name this Web page for example Wikipedia en 4 For Keyword enter your abbreviation of this Web page for example wiki 5 With Create in choose the location of the entry in your bookmarks section You can put it into Quick Searches but any other level is also appropriate 6 Finalize with Add You have successfully generated a new keyword Whenever you need to look into Wikipedia you do not have to use the entire URL Just type wiki Linux to view an entry about Linux 11 6 Printing from Firefox Configure the way Firefox prints the content it displays using the Page Setup dialog Click File Page Setup then go to the Format amp Options tab to select the orientation of your print jobs You can scale or make it auto adjust To print a background select Print Background colors amp images Click the Margins amp Header Footer tab to adjust margins and select what to include in the headers and footers After you configured your settings print a Web page with File gt Print Select the printer or a file in which to save the output With
117. art the down load process 16 6 Using Digikam 16 6 3 Getting Information Getting information about the photograph is not difficult A short summary is displayed as a tool tip if you point with the mouse cursor at the thumbnail For longer information right click the photograph and choose Properties from the menu A dialog box opens with three tabs General EXIF and Histogram General lists the name type owner and some other basic information The more interesting part is the EXIF tab The camera stores some metadata for each photograph Digikam reads these properties and displays them in this list Find the exposure time pixel dimensions and others To get more information for the selected list entry press Shiff FT This shows a small tool tip The last tab His togram shows some statistical information 16 6 4 Managing Albums Digikam inserts a My Albums folder by default which collects all your pho tographs You can store these into subfolders later The albums can be sorted by their directory layout by the collection name that has been set in the album properties or by the date that the albums were first created this date can also be changed in the properties of each album To create a new album you have some possibilities Uploading new photographs from the camera Creating a new album by clicking the New Album button in the toolbar Importing an existing fol
118. askjuggler is a lean but very powerful project management soft ware Take control of your projects using the Gantt charting features or by generating all kinds of reports in XML HTML or CSV format Those users who are not comfortable with controlling applications via the com mand line can use a graphical front end to Taskjuggler Find more informa tion about Taskjuggler at http www taskjuggler org VYM View Your Mind VYM is a software for visualizing your thoughts by creating and manipulating mind maps Most manipulations do not re quire more than one mouse click Branches can be inserted deleted and reordered very easily VYM also offers a set of flags allowing you to mark certain parts of the map important time critical etc Links notes and im ages can be added to a mind map as well VYM mind maps use an XML format allowing you to export your mind maps to HTML easily Find more information about VYM at http www insilmaril de vym 2 1 Office 2 2 Network The following section features various Linux applications for networking pur poses Get to know the most popular Linux browsers and e mail and chat clients Table 2 2 Network Software for Windows and Linux Task Windows Application Linux Application Web Browser Internet Explorer Firefox Konqueror Firefox Opera Opera E Mail MS Outlook Lotus Notes Evolution Kontact Client Personal Information Management Instant Mes MSN AIM Yahoo Messen Kop
119. ation 1104 manpages oooccccccccccnccnco manuals a an OpenOffice org ssssssss SUSE Help Center Us net seansie kiri ua tesa va dus Wikipedia cce eee I Internet AAA eer ned connecting tO eee 241127 wireless 126 J EE 155 JavaScript eccesso serre eee 155 K E MM 2091213 amd UDS cia c rre terre in 212 configuring 6 6 cece eens 210 copying CDs cece eee ee 213 data ei CN 210 KAddressbook ooooooooooo see Kontact KAudioCreator sssssssssssss 190 KDE KGpg clipboard encryption creating keys Lon exporting public keys file encryption 0005 importing keys oooooocoooomo key servers 06 6 cece cece clipboard eege sia asta cones saada commands sa case sense orar 275 configuring 00005 appearance 6 6 eee eee eee eee applications default control center 73 despistada as keyboard oooocooocccccocccccnnons networks cece eee eee eee 5 a A annii ik o A 86 190 KSnapshot serias ima 89 KWallet GE TEE exporting keys ooooooooo importing keys signing keys ssssssssss SE text encryption 0 008 trusting keys ooooocccoooccooooo killall KInternet 0c cece cece
120. ation center For Konqueror try the submodule Web Browser You can customize fonts in spect cookies and determine Web behavior 4 2 5 KDE Components The Component Chooser module handles basic tasks At the moment you can change the e mail client text editor messenger terminal and Web browser Whenever a KDE application needs to start an application of these types it al ways calls the same component SUSE LINUX 75 76 KDE uses File Associations to identify a file type and start appropriate applica tions With this module customize the icon filename patterns description and order of applications Konqueror can also behave like a file manager The File Manager module con figures which fonts and font sizes are used what home URL is used if previews are allowed and if quick copy and move actions are allowed An overview of all plug ins of the KDE daemon is shown in Service Manager This module shows two different types services invoked on start up and services called on demand Normally do not change the settings of this module because it is vital for KDE With Spell Checker KDE provides support for two common spell checking utilities ASpell and ISpell This module sets a default configuration that can be shared with other applications 4 2 6 Peripherals This setting opens the configuration dialogs for the mouse keyboard and printer administration 4 2 7 Power Control
121. ations you have been using so far This chapter points out the most important and powerful Linux applications enabling you to change into your new working environment smoothly ete an ERE RN PEE ENSE Kee 32 2 2 Network 2 22554 2245 88644 m RR RP ba a ee 35 23 Multimedia 20 0000000 e 37 a ESS e eae ee ee xd 40 2 5 System and File Management 42 2 6 Software Development 45 SJOMIJOS XNUI OUM O BULLIES NO 32 The next few sections introduce some of the most powerful Linux counterparts of common Windows software Each section is dedicated to one particular field of application and lists the tasks Windows applications and Linux equivalents These applications are then discussed in further detail and links to more infor mation are provided This list can be by no means complete because software development is an evolutionary process and new applications are being created every minute 2 Office The following section features the most popular and powerful Linux office and business software solutions These include office suites databases accounting software and project management software Table 2 1 Office Software for Windows and Linux Task Windows Application Linux Application Office Suite MS Office StarOffice OpenOffice org StarOffice OpenOffice org Word Processor MS Word StarOf OpenOffice org StarOffice fice OpenOffice org Writer Writer WordPerfect Spreadsheet MS Ex
122. automatic keyboard repeat function to be activated and at what speed the characters are then typed Test the effect of the settings in the field at the bottom of the dialog window Choose parameters that reflect your normal typing habits Enable Slow Keys To prevent accidental typing set a minimum time limit that a key must be pressed and held before it is recognized as valid input by the system Also determine whether audible feedback should be provided for keypress events accepted keypresses and the rejection of a keypress Enable Bounce Keys To prevent double typing set a minimum time limit for ac cepting two subsequent keypress events of the same key as the input of two individual characters If desired activate audible feedback upon rejection of a keypress event Toggle Keys It is possible to request audible feedback from the system when a keycap modifier key is pressed Mouse Activates the keyboard mouse the mouse pointer is controlled with the arrow keys of the number pad Use the sliders to set the maximum speed of the mouse pointer the acceleration time until the maximum speed is reached and the latency between the pressing of a key and the cursor movement 3 2 9 Keyboard Shortcuts Use this module to manage global keyboard combinations It is possible to deter mine the keyboard combinations to use during text input and those for objects on the desktop SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 55 56 The list overvi
123. avigation toolbar includes Forward and Back and a lo cation bar for a Web address Bookmarks are also available for quick access For more information about the various Firefox features use the Help menu File Edit View Bookmarks Tools Help Qa EZ amp x A http www mozillastore com products stuff fire v O Go G N NOVELL Support Entertainment News Internet Search Reference Maps and Directions A E mozilla The Official Mozilla Store Support Mozilla Get Cool Stuff Mozilla Store Software amp Guides Firefox CD and Guidebook Clothing T shirts and polo shirts Other Merchandise Mugs Plush Toys Posters etc Products Support Developers About Shopping Cart E Firefox Plush Toy Get your very own Firefox 9 inch red panda soft plush toy We put the Firefox next to a mug to give you a sense of its size Firefox Plush Toy 15 95 Add to Cart In case you didn t know the Chinese name for a red panda is hunho or firefox Done Figure 11 1 The Browser Window of Firefox 11 1 Navigating Web Sites 11 1 1 Tabbed Browsing If you often use more than one Web page at a time tabbed browsing may make it easier to switch between them Load Web sites in separate tabs within one win dow XOJ9JIJ To open a new tab select File New Tab This opens an empty tab in the Fire fox window Alternatively right click a link
124. azy in regard to checking other people s identities before signing their keys Therefore you could still trust him and his own key but assign lower trust levels to the keys of others that have been signed by him The trust level s purpose is solely one of a reminder It does not trigger any automatic actions by KGpg SUSE LINUX Bd9y uii uoudAJm2u3 169 12 4 The Key Server Dialog Several Internet based key servers offer the public keys of many users To engage in encrypted communication with a large number of users use these servers to distribute your public key For this purpose export your public key to one of these servers Similarly KGpg enables you to search one of these servers for the keys of certain people and import their public keys from the server Open the key server dialog with File gt Key Server Dialog 12 4 1 Importing a Key from a Key Server By means of the Import tab in the key server dialog import public keys from one of the Internet based key servers Use the drop down menu to select one of the preconfigured key servers and enter a search string e mail address of the communication partner or the ID of the key to find When you click Search your system connects to the Internet and searches the specified key server for a key that matches your specifications Refer to Figure 12 3 on this page Import Export Key server hkp subkeys pgp net y Text to search or ID of the key to import
125. be Courier Bold B amp H Lucide al Adobe Helvetica Bold Oblique B amp H Lucida ABCDEFEHIJHLIMNOPARS a Adobe Helvetica Medium Oblique a Bitstream ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS 4 Adobe Times amp Bitstream m THE QUICH BROUIN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG a J l KS Adobe Times Bold Gr Blue Highw THE QUICH BROUIM FOH JUMPS OVER THE LAZY Di Adobe Utopia Bold Italic Blue High THE QUICH BROUN FOX JUMPS OVER THE Adobe Utopia Medium Italic T wc THE QUICK BROUIN E cert THE QUICK BR gt IHE QUICK THE QU 4 E T Airmole Stripe E Almonte 3 Arabic Newspaper S T Axaxax T Baby Jeepers T Baveuse T Baveuse 3D T Berylium Italic allele FARRER E Add Fonts 111 Fonts 17 5 MB Total 92 Families Administrator Mode Figure 4 11 Font Administration from the Control Center To check which fonts are currently available type the URL fonts into the ad dress field of a Konqueror session This displays two windows Personal and System User installed fonts are installed to the folder Personal Only root can install to the Syst em folder To install fonts as a user follow these steps 1 Start the Control Center and access the appropriate module with System Administration gt Font Installer 2 Choose Add Fonts from the toolbar or from the menu available when right clicking the list 3 In the dialog that opens select one or m
126. blematic KWallet remembers them for you It collects all passwords and stores them in an encrypted file With a single password open your wallet to view search delete or create new entries Normally you do not need to insert an entry manually KDE recognizes if a resource requires authentication and KWallet starts automatically SUSE LINUX 83 84 Important M p Protect Your KWallet Password If you forget your KWallet password it cannot be recovered Further more anyone who knows your password can obtain all information contained in the wallet Important al Configuring KWallet When start KWallet for the first time a dialog window appears with the welcome screen Choose between Basic setup and Advanced setup Basic setup is rec ommended If you choose it select in the next screen whether you want to store personal information Some KDE applications like Konqueror or KMail can use the wallet system to store Web form data and cookies Select Yes I wish to use the KDE wallet to store my personal information for this purpose and leave with Finish If you choose Advanced setup you have an additional security level screen The default settings are generally acceptable for most users but others may wish to change them Automatically close idle wallets closes wallets after a period of inactivity To separate network passwords and local passwords activate Store network
127. c release notes RELEASE NOTES en html Enable Actions Alt Ctrl x a Clear Clipboard History Configure Klipper Help 9 Quit Figure 4 3 The Clipboard Klipper As well as the contents of the clipboard the context menu features the following menu items SUSE LINUX doptseq 3d eut 87 88 Enable Actions If you click this a black check mark is displayed in front of it For example if you mark a URL with the mouse when actions are enabled a window opens enabling you to select a browser for displaying this URL Click Enable Actions to disable this function Clear Clipboard History Deletes all entries from the clipboard Configure Klipper This opens the Klipper configuration dialog Control the pro gram with keyboard shortcuts or use regular expressions Check the Klip per handbook for details Former Windows users may appreciate the op tion for activating the keyboard shortcuts CiO and Cm for cutting and CMV for pasting under the General tab To use this feature activate the entry Synchronize contents of the clipboard and the selection in Clip board Selection Behavior Subsequently use the mouse or the keyboard shortcuts to which you are accustomed Help This item opens a submenu from which to open the Klipper handbook send a bug report to the developers and view information about Klipper and KDE Quit If you click Quit a dialog is displayed asking whethe
128. cam to the USB before the bttv driver has been auto matically loaded for example by starting a TV application dev video0 is re served for the webcam In this case if you start motv with the c dev videol parameter to access the TV card you might get an error message because the bttv driver was not automatically loaded Solve this problem by loading the driver separately with modprobe bttv as the user root Access an overview of the configurable video devices on your system with motv hwscan 14 4 nxtvepg The TV Magazine for Your PC From some broadcasters an EPG signal Electronic Program Guide is transmit ted along with the video text signal Easily view this electronic guide using the program nxtvepg To do this however you must have a TV card supported by the bttv driver and be able to receive one of the channels broadcast with an EPG With nxtvepg the broadcasts are sorted according to channel and topic such as movie and sport and filtered according to criteria such as Live Stereo or Sub title Start the application with Multimedia gt Video nxtvepg or at the com mand line with nxtvepg 14 4 1 Importing the EPG Database To set up and update the program database via the EPG signal set the tuner of your TV card to a station that broadcasts EPG This can be done using a TV ap plication such as motv or nxtvepg Only one application at a time can access the tuner SUSE LINUX UJO2Qq9M PUD
129. can starts au tomatically The result is displayed as a tree structure Using Primary and Secondary organize the two top branches of the tree according to the cri teria Album Artist Genre and Year Once the tree view is ready find titles simply by typing them into the input field The selection in the tree view jumps to the first matching entry automatically as you type To update your collection data initiate a rescan of the file system using Tools gt Res can Collection Playlist Browser The playlist browser is divided into two parts The upper part lists all your custom playlists created by dragging tracks into the playlist window and clicking Save Playlist As View the contents of them by click ing the next to the playlist s name Modify these playlists using drag and drop To load one of them double click the playlist 184 132 Multimedia Players Important Sharing Playlists with Other Players Save playlists in m3u or pls format so you can share them with any other players using these formats Important zd amaroK can compile useful playlists Smart Playlists on the fly Use the bottom part of the playlist browser to select one of the smart playlists or click Create Smart Playlist to define a custom smart playlist Enter a name search criteria order and optional track limit xnu ui PUNOS File Browser This tab opens a file browser It
130. cations apart from the TV viewer pia4 a command line controlled movie player for streams recorded by xawtv4 mtt4 a video text browser alexplore a DVB channel scanner built in dvbradio a DVB ra dio player needs an initial channel scan and dvbrowse an EPG browser For more information refer to http linux bytesex org xawtv tvtime tvtime is a lean TV viewer application supporting analog TV Find more information about tvtime including a comprehensive usage guide at http tvtime sourceforge net kdetv A TV viewer and recorder application for the KDE desktop supporting analog TV Find more information about kdetv at http www kdetv org zapping A TV viewer and recorder application for the GNOME desktop sup porting analog TV Find more information about Zapping at http zapping sourceforge net cgi bin view Main WebHome 2 4 Graphics The following section presents some of the Linux software solutions for graphics work These include simple drawing applications as well as fully fledged image editing tools and powerful rendering and animation programs 2 4 Graphics Table 2 4 Graphics Software for Windows and Linux Task Windows Application Linux Application Simple Graphic MS Paint The GIMP Editing Professional Adobe Photoshop Paint The GIMP Graphic Editing Shop Pro Corel Pho toPaint The GIMP Creating Vector Adobe Illustrator Corel OpenOffice org Draw Graphics Draw OpenOffice org Inkscape
131. cel StarOf OpenOffice org StarOffice fice OpenOffice org Calc Calc Presentation MS PowerPoint StarOffice OpenOffice org Impress Presentation OpenOf StarOffice Presentation fice org Impress Data Plotting MS Excel MicroCall Ori OpenOffice org Calc gin Gnuplot Local Database MS Access OpenOf OpenOffice org MySQL fice org MySQL Rekall knoda PostgreSQL Financial Ac MS Money Quicken GnuCash moneyplex counting moneyplex Project Manage MS Project Planner Taskjuggler ment 2 1 Office Mind Mapping MindManager Free Mind VYM View Your Mind OpenOffice org OpenOffice org is the Open Source answer to MS Office It is a very powerful office suite including a word processor Write a spread sheet and database manager Calc a presentation manager Impress and a drawing program Draw Users familiar with the MS Office family of ap plications find a very similar application interface and all the functionality to which they are accustomed Because OpenOffice org is capable of import ing data from MS Office applications the transition from one office suite to the other is very smooth A Windows version of OpenOffice org even exists enabling Windows users to switch to an Open Source alternative while still using Windows Find more information about OpenOffice org athttp www openoffice org and read Chapter elon page 109 for an introduction to OpenOffice org and a short guide to migrating your data from one office sui
132. ch Alternatively drag a file from the desktop or another folder to the New Message window or select one of the options in the Attach menu Normally the format of a file is recognized correctly If this is not the case right click the icon From the menu that appears select Properties This opens a dialog in which to set the format and the name of the file and add a description In addition decide whether the attached file should be signed or encrypted When you are finished composing your message send it immediately with Mes sage gt Send or move it to the outbox with Message gt Queue If you do the former the message is copied to sent mail after having been sent successfully If you do the latter it is moved to the outbox Messages in the outbox can still be edited or deleted 8 3 Mail 8 3 3 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures To encrypt your e mail first generate a key pair as described in Chapter 12 on page 165 To configure the details of the encryption procedure select Settings gt Configure KMail gt Identities to specify the identity under which to send en crypted and signed messages Then press Modify After confirming with OK the key should be displayed in the corresponding field Close the configuration dialog with OK 8 3 4 Folders Message folders help to organize your messages By default they are located in the directory Mail When starting
133. corresponds to the standard KDE file selector dialog with the usual controls for navigating the file system En ter a URL or directory directly into the text input field From the contents displayed drag elements to the playlist to include them You can also per form a recursive search for a file in a given directory To do so enter a text string for the title and the location at which to start the search Then select Search and wait for the results to appear in the lower section of the win dow The Cover Manager amaroK features a cover manager to enable you to keep matching music and im age data on the albums you play Start the Cover Manager with Tools gt Cover Manager A tree view in the left part of the window lists all the albums of your collection The covers retrieved from Amazon are displayed in the right part of the window With View choose what is displayed in the cover list view All al bums lists all albums of your collection regardless of whether they have a cover image Albums with cover lists only those with a cover and Albums without cover lists those lacking a cover To retrieve cover data choose your Amazon Locale then click Fetch Missing Covers amaroK then tries to get covers for all albums contained in your collection Effects Select the FX button in the player window or use the amaroK application menu to open a dialog in which to enable and configure several
134. cs project It meets the needs of both amateurs and professionals 181 Graphics Format 236 182 StartingGIMP lees 236 183 Getting Started in GIMP 238 184 Savinglmages 240 185 Printing Images o 241 18 6 For More Information 241 dINID SUL ULM sojydog Buljojndiuoy 236 Like many other Linux programs The GIMP is developed as a cooperative effort of developers worldwide who volunteer their time and code to the project The program is under constant development so the version included in your SUSE LINUX may vary slightly from the version discussed here The layout of the indi vidual windows and window sections is especially likely to vary The GIMP is an extremely complex program Only a small range of features tools and menu items are discussed in this chapter See Section on page for ideas of where to find more information about the program 18 1 Graphics Formats There are two main formats for graphics pixel and vector The GIMP works only with pixel graphics which is the normal format for photographs and scanned images Pixel graphics consist of small blocks of color that together cre ate the entire image The files can easily become quite large because of this It is also not possible to increase the size of a pixel image without losing quality Unlike pixel graphics vector graphics do not store information for all individual pixels Instead
135. ction Method amp Cache O Tag People U Tag Places Select None Images 275 Comments Category Date Thursday 24 February Help w ok X Cancel 34 Figure 16 4 Finding Similar Pictures Batch Processes Digikam also provides some batch processes that perform a specific task on lots of files This can be renaming converting resizing and much more Find them under Tools gt Batch Processes 16 7 For More Information For more information about using digital cameras with Linux refer to the follow ing Web sites http digikam sourceforge net Information about Digikam http gphoto sourceforge net Information about gPhoto gPhoto2 and gPhoto2 compatible GUIs 224 16 7 For More Information BB 4540888 o 5 z gu d B Find Duplicate Image Results 6 Duplicates Found r Original Files r Similar Files amp IMG_3115a JPG IMG_3115 JPG a Image size 1704x2272 pixels Image size 1704x2272 pixels O File size 446867 bytes File size 1629101 bytes O Modified 2005 02 24 11 37 Modified 2004 11 22 11 50 c Album NZ 2004 Album NZ 2004 Q Comments Comments J Files Identical To Q KE O MG_3259 JPG 5 O img 3488 jpg C O img 3715 jpg gt X lt O img 3818 jpg O img 3820 jpg Figure 16 5 Results of Find http www thekompany com projects gphoto Information about Kamera a KDE front end fo
136. ctory it prevents users from deleting each other s files Typical examples include the tmp and var tmp directories drwxrwxrwt 2 root root 1160 2002 11 19 17 15 tmp 19 2 6 Access Control Lists The traditional permission concept for Linux file system objects such as files or directories can be expanded by means of ACLs access control lists They allow the assignment of permissions to individual users or groups other than the origi nal owner or owning group of a file system object Files or directories bearing extended access permissions can be detected with a simple 1s 1 command rw r r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap The output of 1s does not reveal much of a change compared to an 1s on a file without an ACL Roadmap is owned by tux who belongs to the group project3 tux holds both write and read access to this file and his group as well as all other users have read access The only difference that distinguishes this file from a file without an ACL is the additional in the first column holding the per mission bits Get details about the ACL by executing getfacl Roadmap SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM 8uptoM 259 260 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 file Roadmap owner tux group project3 user rw user jane rw ffective r group r group djungle rw ffective r mask r other The first three lines of the output do not hold any information not available with ls 1 Thes
137. customized according to your preferences and needs Control Center in the main menu opens the configuration dialog for your KDE desktop The following section introduces a number of modules You can also start it with the command kcont rol Tip Using Konqueror for Your Settings You can also use Konqueror to view and modify your settings Type settings in your location bar and Konqueror displays all the modules in icon view or tree view according to your configuration dosed Jay eut Tip 4 2 1 Using the KDE Control Center After starting the KDE Control Center see the main window It has its menus at the top and a sidebar on the left The configuration is displayed on the right You can change the appearance of the sidebar with the View menu Switch from the tree view to icon view or vice versa To configure some shortcuts go to Set tings Configure Shortcuts The sidebar contains three tabs The first Index displays all the modules ac cording to the settings of the View menu The second Search enables you to search for some keywords With the last tab Help read small help texts about the current module 4 2 2 Appearance amp Themes This item features all fine tuning options for the appearance of your desktop Background lets you choose a color picture or slideshow for your background desktop If you do not like the actual color scheme modify it in Colo
138. d editor SUSE LINUX 6d2 um uodo 171 172 Import Export Key server hkp subkeys pgp net X Key to be exported 0x59847CF5 John Doe lt jdoe example com gt z X Export attributes photo id Q9 Close Figure 12 5 Exporting a Key to a Key Server 12 5 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard Files copied to the clipboard can easily be encrypted with a few clicks Open the function overview by clicking the KGpg icon Select Encrypt Clipboard and des ignate the key to use A status message about the encryption procedure is dis played on the desktop The encrypted contents can now be processed from the clipboard as needed The decryption of clipboard contents is just as easy Simply open the menu on the panel select Decrypt Clipboard and enter the password associated with your private key The decrypted version is now available for pro cessing in the clipboard and in the KGpg editor 12 5 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping To encrypt or decrypt files click the icons on the desktop or in the file manager drag them to the padlock in the panel and drop them there If the file is not en crypted KGpg asks for the key to use As soon as you select a key the file is en crypted without any further messages In the file manager encrypted files are designated with the suffix asc and the padlock icon These files can be de crypted by clicking the file icon dragging it to
139. d normally like the command gunzip taroptions archive file s tar puts one or more files into an archive Compression is optional tar is a quite complex command with a number of options available The most frequently used options are f Writes the output to a file and not to the screen as is usually the case c Creates a new tar archive r Adds files to an existing archive t Outputs the contents of an archive u Adds files but only if they are newer than the files already contained in the archive x Unpacks files from an archive extraction z Packs the resulting archive with gzip j Compresses the resulting archive with bzip2 v Lists files processed SUSE LINUX ________ 263 264 The archive files created by tar end with tar If the tar archive was also compressed using gzip the ending is tgz or tar gz If it was com pressed using bzip2 the ending is tar bz2 Application examples can be found in Section 19 1 8 on page 253 locate pattern s This command is only available if you have installed the findutils locate package The locate command can find in which directory a specified file is located If desired use wild cards to specify file names The program is very speedy because it uses a database specifically created for the purpose rather than searching through the entire file sys tem This very fact however also results in a major drawback locate is unable to find any files created after the latest updat
140. d the new item to the desktop c Right click the new desktop icon and select Properties d Enter the name of the new object in the Basic tab Select an appropri ate icon via the Emblems tab Finally determine the file system per missions assigned to this object using the Permissions tab Read more on file system permissions in Section on page e Close the Properties dialog to apply your changes Configuring KDE Desktop Components Procedure 1 4 Adding a New Application to the Quick Launch Area 1 Right click an empty patch of the panel where you want to add the new application 2 Choose Add gt Application Button from the menu that appears 3 Select the application from one of the categories of the submenu Procedure 1 5 Changing the Desktop Background 1 Right click the desktop SUSE LINUX 904002 4511 11 2 Choose Configure Desktop A dialog opens that allows the modification of the desktop settings Background Behavior Multiple Desktops Screen Saver and Display 3 Choose Background and determine whether your settings should be ap plied to one specific desktop or to all Select a background image disable background images or start a slide show Options offers several settings for the positioning of the background image the background color and the blending of colored backgrounds 4 Apply your changes and leave
141. d transparency Some users created configuration sets and uploaded them to a Web page Theme Manager let you choose and install different themes for your KDE desktop Window Decorations are another style setting If you change the setting the ex ample below changes 4 2 3 Desktop Behavior allows you to change some general issues about your desktop You can activate previews for some specific files or enable device icons The central place for user defined resources is KDE Resources Choose a re source like Calendar Contacts or Notes Then click Add Depending on your selection it displays a window in which to select the type of the new resource The next step opens a new window with specific settings for this type If you con firm with Ok the resource can be used in other KDE applications for example KOrganizer Multiple Desktops let you choose up to 20 virtual desktops with individual names Move the slider to change the value Use the text fields to give your desk tops names With the Panels module set the position of the panel You can put any panel on the left right top or bottom of the screen The other tabs contain settings to hide 4 2 Settings the panel or add special menus It is also possible to modify the background or enable transparency The Taskbar modules configure the taskbar which provides the window list in the panel How the taskbar groups windo
142. dd groupware resources is with a separate tool To use it close Kontact then run groupwarewizard in a command line Select the server type such as SLOX Groupwise or Exchange from the list offered then enter the address and authentication data The wizard then adds the available resources to Kontact Important _ Kontact can access multiple address books such as shared ones offered by Nov ell GroupWise or an LDAP server Select Settings gt Show Extension Bar Address Books to view the current address books Press Add to add one then select the type and enter the required information The check boxes in front of the books show the activation status of each To stop display of a book without deleting it uncheck it Remove deletes the selected book from the list 8 5 Calendar Kontact uses KOrganizer as its calendar component To configure it use Settings gt Configure KOrganizer With the calendar enter appointments and schedule meetings with others If desired be reminded of upcoming events You can also import export and archive calendars with the options in File 8 5 Calendar File Edit View Go Actions Schedule Settings Help mjE 4 P9 FPES EEG Es Cl February 2005 O Mon 28 Tue 1 Wed 2 Thu 3 Fri 4 anus Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Y Y 5 12 34 5 6 a 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 A Day Mail 7 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 B 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Qa 9 e 10 Contacts
143. der of photographs from your hard disk select Album gt Import gt Import Folders Right clicking My Albums and selecting New Album After selecting to create and album in your preferred way a dialog box appears Give your album a title Optionally choose a collection insert some comments and select an album date The collection is a way of organizing your albums by a common label This label is used when you select View gt Sort Albums gt By Collection The comment is shown in the banner at the top of the main window The album date is used when you select View gt Albums gt By Date Digikam uses the first photograph in the album as the preview icon in the My Albums list To select a different one right click the respective photograph and select Set as Album Thumbnail from the context menu SUSE LINUX xnur PUD SOIOLUDD JOLIBIG 221 222 16 6 5 Managing Tags Managing lots of different photographs with different albums can sometimes be complex To organize individual photographs Digikam provides the My Tag system For example you have photographed your friend John at different times and you want to collect all images independent of your album This let you find all photographs very easily First create a new tag by clicking My Tags gt People From the context menu choose New Tag In the dialog box that appears
144. dit development sssssss 45 Rosegarden 0 0 cece eee HENO Totem vie REENEN EN et A tese s een Aen He AVTE eeh eer eerie eibrestiosa GIK qt KDevelop XMMS sst ke eet 186 Mono coccccnnccccnnn conc REES UDE E O A tem arenas Subversion sEvolutiom eisen t ome s prap NICS eigaran vestes t seb ni O ds Re EE See ee Blender iran Deg dere AGA E ER WEE 41 EE Digikam 14211219 GnomeMeeting GIMP oi sets ei kbear sese AUEREN SR gThumb 0005 Konqueror usse Gwenview Kontact ococcocccccrcocoooo Inkscape 6 cece eee cece eens 41 Kopete cessa cei serene Kooka 0 c cece eee e eee A AA POVRAY ni sted aceslhawesennsas anes uo T installing oooooooccccocrccccooo A seien dnx eR ER re TEE GENEE amaroK cece eee ees eEvolutiotr co ctancathagiciawess Audacity trikia eein GnuCash 0 66 nid ini eee eee audacity 0c ennea Gnuplot 06 c cece eee eee e EE khoda eere eee 280 Kontact moneyplex 00 eee sees OpenOffice org Planner PostgreSQL recse Lens den enne Rekall soria g eoe StarOffice 2 0 0 ccc eee eee Taskjuggler sVYM aida dd dos starting Cosine oine ea eee eee ee ATeCOf A snpra eg elus Audacity aitor atdacity iioc eese aeuum Y 192 B Bash ganda teat wer rera nn e ers 24611254 commands
145. e taken from the man page for man itself Table 5 1 Man Pages Categories and Descriptions Number Description 1 Executable programs or shell commands 5 2 Man Pages System calls functions provided by the kernel Library calls functions within program libraries Special files usually found in dev File formats and conventions etc fstab Games N o 0i P CQ N Miscellaneous including macro packages and conventions e g man 7 groff 7 oo System administration commands usually only for root 9 Kernel routines nonstandard Generally man pages are delivered with the associated command They can be browsed in the help center or directly in a shell To display a man page in a shell use the man command For example to display the man page for 1s enter man 1s Each man page consists of several parts labeled NAME SYNOPSIS DE SCRIPTION SEE ALSO LICENSING and AUTHOR There may be additional sections available depending on the type of command With Q exit the man page viewer Another possibility to display a man page is to use Konqueror Start Konqueror and type for example man 1s If there are different categories for a command Konqueror displays them as links 5 3 Info Pages Info pages are another important source of information on your system Usually they are more verbose than man pages You can browse an info page with an info viewer and display the different sections called nodes Us
146. e GNOME Mixer Applet crease and decrease the volume Stereo channels can be controlled independently using Q W and E for increasing the volume and and C for decreasing the volume The number keys between 0 and 9 can be used to change the abso lute volume quickly These correspond to zero to ninety percent of full volume 13 1 4 Look and Feel of Mixer Applications The look and feel of mixer applications depends on the type of sound card used Some drivers like SB Live have many controllable tunable mixer elements while the drivers for professional sound cards may have elements with totally different names On Board Sound Chip Most of the PCI on board sound chips are based on AC97 codec Master controls the main volume from the front speakers Surround Center and LFE con trol the rear center and bass boost speakers Each of them has a mute switch In addition to that some boards have individual Headphone and Master Mono volumes The latter is used for the built in speaker on some laptops 13 1 Mixers PCM controls the internal volume level of digital WAVE playback PCM is an acronym for Pulse Code Modulation one of the digital signal formats This con trol has also an individual mute switch Other volumes like CD Line Mic and Aux control the loopback volume from the corresponding input to the main output They do not influence the recordi
147. e HE es 23 Multimedia llle Vb ee ER CRS A xu e e EEG mas 25 System and File Management 2 6 Software Development 3 The GNOME Desktop GE Th Desktop ebe At be ee ELSE 311 Whe Icons yns soday E o e A A EE 3 1 3 ThePanels llle D 2 Settngs scs dos sup Mae AO demum oe PE io serie ae e oc de d 321 Keyboard s sce iia erede m epo eoe tene deua 3 2 2 Mouse Configuration less 323 Menus and Toolbars o 8 22 4 WIndOWS e geg e Rem eth le eas 9 2 5 Background esac s a E ERE 9 46 Font 66s ee oo EHH ES SEH m ERG 827 Theme e oe Rog aoe we oe eh ook ae es 5 28 Xccessibility e ie Raed RES LE Bae ent 3 2 9 Keyboard Shortcuts 2 ooo ooo o Contents 3 210 Assistive Technology llle 56 3 2 11 Sound System Alerte 56 ba ns dug ue bso X doses 56 9 213 S ssions 9x93 oR RRA ro REA GONE TAA 57 3 3 File Management with Nautilus eee 57 3 3 1 Navigating in Nautilus llle 57 332 File Management 58 Bet Ord ges ut adco eae Sede dares 59 3 34 Configuring Nautilus o 60 3 4 lLmnportantUtilities e pem ua ea Ro ee 61 3 4 1 Taking Notes with Tomboy o o 61 542 Dicuonary 24 3 6 pad o RR RR eRe 61 3 43 Messaging with Game 62 3 4 4 Watching Movies with Totem o o 63 3 45 Managing Archives with File Roller 63 3 5 Assistive Technology Sup
148. e a considerable amount of time O KDE contains the application KFind which is launched from the main menu with a Find Files The search window is divided into the tabs Name Location Con tents and Properties In the Name Location tab enter the name of the file 2 using wild cards like asterisks or question marks if needed Enter the path to search and determine whether the search should include subfolders or be case sensitive The Contents tab is used to search the contents of files for certain ex pressions This type of search is only supported for a limited number of file types such as text files and OpenOffice org or KWord formats You can even use regu lar expressions if KRegExpEditor is installed package kdeutils3 extra To limit the scope of the search by providing attributes like file owner file size or modification date use the Properties tab Tip More Information about Search Patterns For more information about search patterns and the use of wild cards or regular expressions refer to Section 19 1 on page 246 8 P pag Tip 1 5 Applications SUSE LINUX comes with a wealth of applications There is a Linux option for al most any purpose Quite often you even find more than one suitable application for your purpose ChapterD on page 31 provides a comprehensive list of applica tions you might look for when converting from MS Windows There easily find the Linux a
149. e and click Connect to connect to the selected network If additional configuration efforts are needed to connect to the selected network 1 9 Networking and Mobility click Start YaST to launch the YaST network module for wireless network de vices Current connection Scan for Wireless Networks Name Value s 2 signal strength 87 Connected since Connection details Log signal strength Bitrate deed E ETT Channel Frequency ESSID Name networkaddress 904002 4511 broadcast IP mac mask Signal Link Quality Noise level activity Oo OK Close 4 Figure 1 8 KInternet Status of Wireless Link The Current Connection tab allows you to monitor the state of your current wireless connection The left hand view of this tab offers a summary of all con nection parameters regarding network address and ESSID signal quality signal and noise level channel frequency and speed and encryption parameters such as type of encryption and key length Select any of these parameters in the tree structure and check the details displayed in the right part of the window Monitoring Wireless Connections Add Network Monitor to your GNOME panel to get visual feedback on the qual ity of your wireless connection Right click the panel icon and select Preferences to set the monitor to the correct device if you have more than one wireless device connected to your machine Add Wireless Network
150. e files can only be modified by the superuser For more information about the Linux permis sion and user concept refer to Section 19 2 on page 255 P pag While this concept may not look very appealing at first it adds to security A user without root privileges cannot damage the entire system Any damage caused is strictly limited to the user s own account and data Any operation executed with root privileges may potentially harm the entire system Anyone intending to harm a running Linux system must gain root privileges first This is why it is much harder to create viruses for Linux systems They have to overcome the root barrier first As well as offering different user identities for administrators and normal users Linux supports multiple users working on one machine simultaneously These users can connect to the system via different terminals or network connections 1 3 Desktop SUSE LINUX offers several choices for your desktop GNOME and KDE the most common desktops provide features and functions similar to those of the desktop used in Microsoft Windows or Mac OS This section introduces their most important features and helps you to get accustomed to your new desktop environment 1 3 1 Desktop Terminology The following list introduces some terms often used in a desktop context regard less of the base system However some of them have different meanings in differ ent desktop environment or are even limited to one environme
151. e geg E configuring rpari kopierer airas creating images opening images printing oar ice eee eain savingimages sssssse STARS dese ek ee bere e e EEN Mu qp GNOME ocios etek EE uec ge applets cocina EEE R R E applications default SED OT commands e NNN etate configuring 4 accessibility o background ooooccccoccccccccncos SO Ate takin dyad datasets ties 154 keyboard 0 cece eee keyboard shortcuts PMEMUG oo cas edere tek heh doen MOUSE rr ENEE gd xsystem alerts ce envers themes ge toolbars 2 0 0 e cece eee ee WEE desktop menu e IER Eed ancora pore vetus el z File Roller niet edd tme 163 e EE Nautilus i eene mr er teg e SOMES Lodi eade Ne dob CR DR Arad ed pels vacances Ae printing SESSIONS 57 SSOUNC sitiada 178 Index tomboy 2 cece ee ees utilities oooooooooomo 164 A Heb esa de Sen 246 gplioto2 nis did c ort eee 217 graphics AAA inni purn arana s 221 digital cameras sse 215 edititig EE file formats galleries correr e Tee e VeCEOE ice eben e ates EE edel Drees att qd GRIP EH e EEN camera selection nstalling cocos A e Seege ehe eR e Ea Sr ars EE H halt ira 268 hard disks A Lee eris 274 defragmenting 274 hardware supported EE 219 p HOWTOs info pages Linux document
152. e lines only state filename owner and owning group Lines 4 to 9 hold the ACL entries Conventional access permissions represent a subset of those possible when using ACLs The example ACL grants read and write ac cess to the owner of the file as well as to user jane lines 4 and 5 The conven tional concept has been expanded allowing access to an extra user The same ap plies to the handling of group access The owning group holds read permissions line 6 and the group d jungle holds read and write permissions The mask en try in line 8 reduces the effective permissions for the user jane and the group djungle to read access Other users and groups do not get any kind of access to the file line 9 Only very basic information has been provided here Find more detailed informa tion about ACLs in the Administration Guide 19 3 Important Linux Commands This section gives insight into the most important commands of your SUSE LINUX system Along with the individual commands parameters are listed and where appropriate a typical sample application is introduced To learn more about the various commands use the manual pages accessed with man followed by the name of the command for example man 1s In the man pages move up and down with and PgDn Move between the beginning and the end of a document with Home and End End this viewing mode by pressing Q Learn more about the man command itself with man man There are many more com
153. e of its database The database can be generated by root with updatedb updatedb options s This command performs an update of the database used by 1ocate To include files in all existing directories run the program as root It also makes sense to place it in the background by appending an ampersand amp so you can immediately continue working on the same command line updatedb amp This command usually runs as a daily cron job see cron daily find option s With find search for a file in a given directory The first argument specifies the directory in which to start the search The option name must be followed by a search string which may also include wild cards Unlike locate which uses a database find scans the actual direc tory Commands to Access File Contents cat option s file s The cat command displays the contents of a file printing the entire contents to the screen without interruption n Numbers the output on the left margin less option s file s This command can be used to browse the con tents of the specified file Scroll half a screen page up or down with and or a full screen page down with Spoce Jump to the beginning or end of a file using and End Press Q to exit the program grep option s searchstring filenames The grep command finds a specific search string in the specified file s If the search string is found the command displays the line in which the searchstring was found al
154. e the command info for this task For example to view the info page of info itself type info infoin the shell For more convenience use the Help Center or Konqueror Start Konqueror and type info to view the top level To display the info page for grep type info grep SUSE LINUX uouojueuunoo PUD et 103 To be able to search a document there needs to exist a search index The status column of the list below shows if an index for a document exists To create an index check the box in the list and press the Build Index button Search Scope Status E O Administration Missing O Appendix Missing O Excursions Missing O installation Missing O Internet Missing O Introducing Linux Missing O KDE Application Manuals Missing O Multimedia Missing O office Missing F E Release Notes Missing EN Index folder var cache susehelp Change X Cancel Figure 5 3 Generating a Search Index 5 4 The Linux Documentation Project The Linux Documentation Project TLDD is run by a team of volunteers who write Linux and Linux related documentation see http www tldp org The set of documents contains tutorials for beginners but is mainly focused on experienced users like professional system administrators TLDP publishes HOWTOs FAQs and guides handbooks under a free license 5 4 1 HOWTOs HOWTOs are usually a short informal step by step guide to accomplish a spe cific task It is written by experts
155. ed image SUSE LINUX 53 54 Style determines what processing steps should be applied to the selected image to adapt it optimally to the current screen resolution The options are Centered Fill Screen Scaled and Tiled 3 2 6 Font This module determines the font to use for the desktop In a second step enable optional effects for the improvement of the font quality The upper part of the di alog window shows the fonts selected for Application font Desktop font Win dow title font and Terminal font Click one of the buttons to open a selection dialog in which to set the font family style and size The options for Font Ren dering and the additional configuration options accessible through Details are set to optimal values by default 3 2 7 Theme The style for all control elements on the desktop and of GNOME applications is set here Choose from various preinstalled themes Selecting a style in the list overview applies it automatically Theme Details opens another dialog in which to customize the style of single desktop elements like window controls window borders and icons Making changes and leaving the dialog with Close switches the theme to Custom theme Click Save theme to save your modified theme under a custom name The Internet and other sources provide many additional themes for GNOME as tar gz files Install these with Ins
156. eld is Search URI Pressing and clicking in the field opens a small help The search query is specified as V The challenge is inserting this at the correct position In this case the settings for the SUSE support database looks like this Search provider name is SUSE Support Database Search URI is one line https portal suse com PM page search pm q amp t opt ionSdbKeywords amp m 25 amp 1 en amp x t rue and URI shortcuts is sdb_en After approving with Ok two times enter your query in Konqueror s location bar for example sdb_en kernel The result is displayed in the current win dow 10 4 Bookmarks Instead of remembering and reentering addresses for sites visited often you can bookmark these URLs using the Bookmark menu Apart from Web page ad dresses you can also bookmark any directories of your local disk in this way To create a new bookmark in Konqueror click Bookmarks Add Bookmark Any bookmarks added previously are included as items in the menu It is a good idea to arrange the bookmark collection by subjects in a hierarchical structure so that you do not lose track of the different items Create a new subgroup for your bookmarks with New Bookmark Folder Selecting Bookmarks gt Edit Bookmarks opens the bookmark editor Use this program to organize rearrange add and delete bookmarks If you are using Netscape Mozilla or Firefox as add
157. elect Settings gt Configure KMail It is a fully featured e mail client that supports a number of protocols Tools contains several useful tools Use Find to perform a detailed search for messages Anti Spam Wizard can help manage unwanted commercial e mails Anti Virus Wizard helps manage virus e mails These two wizards work with external spam and virus software If the options are disabled install additional packages 8 3 1 Configuring Accounts Kontact can manage several e mail addresses such as your private e mail ad dress and your business address When writing an e mail select one of the iden tities previously defined by clicking View gt Identity To create a new identity 8 3 Mail File Edit View Go Folder Message Tools Settings Help 444999099 CA Folder Unread Total E gt Search Status Any Status X Local Fold e Summary e E zen S Subject Receiver inbox a 1 Hey Tux Penguin BUE ai EN day Geek d SH 2 trash S drafts Contacts E Searches Es D jp Vi Meeting today Calendar V H From Tux lt tux example com gt To do List To Geeko Lizard lt geeko example com gt H pate Today 15 25 31 LA Im Journal M uo L did miss something important Notes M Geeko la 5 Feeds s Et s g Synchronization e 2 messages 0 unread Figure 8 2 The Kontact Mail Component pro
158. ent image The bottom portion of the window contains three tabs With them select the cur rent brush gradient and pattern 18 3 Getting Started in GIMP Although GIMP can be a bit overwhelming for new users most quickly find it easy to use once they work out a few basics Crucial basic functions are creating opening and saving images 18 3 1 Creating a New Image To create a new image select File New or press CMN This opens a dialog in which to make settings for the new image If desired use Template to select a template on which to base the new image The GIMP includes a number of tem plates ranging from an A4 sheet of paper to a CD cover from which to choose 18 3 Getting Started in GIMP To create a custom template select File Dialogs gt Templates and use the controls offered by the window that opens In the Image Size section set the size of the image to create in pixels or another unit Click the unit to select another unit from the list of available units The ra tio between pixels and a unit is set in Resolution which appears when the Ad vanced Options section is open A resolution of 72 pixels per inch corresponds to screen display It is sufficient for Web page graphics A higher resolution should be used for images to print For most printers a resolution of 300 pixels per inch results in an acceptable quality In Colorspace select whether the
159. enter offers additional manuals and guides for various topics or programs More can be found at http www tldp org guides html SUSE LINUX UOILOJUSLUNDOG pup dieu 105 106 They range from Bash Guide for Beginners to Linux Filesystem Hierarchy to Linux Administrator s Security Guide Generally guides are more detailed and exhaustive than a HOWTO or FAQ They are usually written by experts for ex perts Some of these books are old but still valid Install books and guides with YaST 5 7 Usenet Created in 1979 before the rise of the Internet Usenet is one of the oldest com puter networks and still in active use The format and transmission of Usenet articles is very similar to e mail but is developed for a many to many commu nication Usenet is organized into seven topical categories comp for computer related discussions misc for miscellaneous topics news for newsgroup related mat ters rec for recreation and entertainment sci for science related discussions soc for social discussions and talk for various controversial topics The top levels are split in subgroups For instance comp os linux hardware is a news group for Linux specific hardware issues Before you can post an article have your client connect to a news server and sub scribe to a specific newsgroup News clients include Knode or Evolution Each news server communicates to other news servers and exchanges articles with them Not all newsgro
160. eo Source and Network Search 198 I 199 bee mies gen 199 E EW WEEE SLO OE RE edes 200 142 Video Text Support s s ss dosi a cuiae a aoe a AE e a a 200 ERA See AR ede ae an e e aedi 201 T 201 SUSE LINUX XV 14 4 1 Importing the EPG Database 201 We Ye eer knob Fe ue EC e cir A e du 202 145 Watching Digital Video Broadcasts with xawtv4 203 ie eae Soe ee ee a oe ee d 205 Mae eS ds ae ee ee da 206 Cet eke we eee SA RASA REY ee Sa eS 206 14 668 Command mei 206 209 RW edt bebe ee dbase EE 210 T 212 i oO ee GH oo OA eee eh ees oe Cu 213 ae ae O ene tes 213 Loca et Jed M UV ee Rr d EE 213 215 EEN 216 S de god RESI Eee est e due ae a 216 T TT 217 Wat eebe E EE EN Ee 217 cp Dc p 218 CPI 219 OUR 2544 URGE dee wees 219 220 i Be esi E Gh eth we Ge wk ee 221 Ane ee oo Ae eye ek ee 221 16 6 5 Managinglags eee 222 166 6 Useful Tools lll 222 PARIO GU EE EE 224 xvi Contents 17 Kooka A Scanning Application 17 1 The Preview 17 2 The Final Scan 173 The Menus 17 4 The Gallery V Excursions 19 Working with the Shell 19 1 Introduction to Bash 19 1 1 Commands 19 1 2 Files and Directories 19 1 3 Bash Functions 19 1 5 Wild Cards 19 1 7 Pipes 17 5 Optical Character Recognition 18 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP 18 1 Graphics Formats 18 2 Starting GIMP 18 2 1 Initial Configuration 18 2 2 The Default Windows
161. eping your system up to date by always applying the software updates pro vided by SUSE see Section on the preceding page adds to the security of your system These updates fix possible exploits contained in the application code Protect your system or your network against external visitors by running a fire wall A preconfigured firewall is started on installation providing maximum se curity to your network If you need to add support for certain services and do not maintain your system yourself ask your system administrator to make the necessary adjustments in the firewall settings Otherwise read the chapter about security in the Administration Guide and learn how to secure your network using SuSEFirewall SUSE LINUX 23 24 1 9 Networking and Mobility GNOME and KDE offer several applications for working in a network environ ment or using a mobile computer It is much more convenient and much easier to click a small icon to connect to or disconnect from a network than to manually run some script Monitoring the power state of your mobile computer via a small icon is easier than watching obscure system messages The following sections in troduce some of these little helpers but many more are offered by your desktop environment 1 9 1 Networking Network connections even wireless ones can be easily configured and moni tored by small applications seamlessly integrating into your desktop panel KIn ternet can be used
162. epre sented by two dots By entering 1s seethe contents of the parent directory of the current directory The command 1s shows the contents of the direc tory two levels higher in the hierarchy Second Example Working with Paths Here is another example to illustrate how to move around in the directories of your SUSE LINUX system 19 1 Introduction to Bash 1 Change into your home directory with the command cd Then create a di rectory in it with the name test2 by entering mkdir test2 2 Change into the new directory with cd test2 and create a subdirectory in it with the name subdirectory To change into it use the expansion function enter cd su then press Tab The shell expands the rest of the di rectory name 3 Now try to move the previously created file Test backup into the current directory subdirectory without changing the direc tory again To achieve this specify the relative path to that file mv test Testbackup The dot at the end of this command is re quired to tell the shell that the current directory is the destination to which to move the file in this example refers to your home directory 19 1 5 Wild Cards Another convenience offered by the shell is wild cards There are four different types of these in Bash Matches exactly one arbitrary character Matches any number of characters set Matches one of the characters from the group specified inside the square brackets whic
163. epresents the highest possible am plitude in the selected audio format Amplification shows the value needed to amplify the selected segment to this peak amplitude A negative value indicates overamplification 13 4 3 Saving and Exporting To save the entire project select File gt Save Project or Save Project As This generates an XML file with the extension aup which describes the project The actual audio data is saved in a directory named after the project with data ap pended xnur ui PUNOS The entire project or the currently selected segment can also be exported as a stereo WAV file To export the project in Ogg Vorbis format refer to the informa tion in Section 13 3 3 on page 13 5 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files arecord and aplay from the alsa package provide a simple and flexible in terface to the PCM devices arecord and aplay can be used to record and play audio data in the WAV format and other formats The command arecord d 10 f cd t wav mysong wav records a WAV file of 10 seconds in CD qual ity 16 bit 44 1 kHz List all options of arecord and aplay by running them with the help option qaRecord package kalsatools is a simple recording program with a graph ical interface and level display Because this program uses an internal buffer of about 1 MB configurable with buffersize it enables uninterrupted record ings even on slow hardware especially if it is run with real t
164. er Gnopernicus with magnification speech and braille support and a text entry interface Dasher Activate the support for any assistive technology via the the GNOME control center that can be accessed by selecting Desktop Prefer ences 3 5 1 GNOME On Screen Keyboard Gnome On Screen Keyboard GOK provides a virtual keyboard on screen to those users who cannot use standard mouse and keyboard devices to control their computers With appropriate hardware support you can use a joystick or any pointer device as the input device Figure 3 6 GOK in Use The following example of using a text editor via GOK should illustrate the way how GOK works Procedure 3 2 Editing a Text File via GOK 1 Click Launcher in the main menu See Figure 3 6 on this page 2 Select Text editor to launch a GNOME text editor and click back to return to the main menu 3 Hit Compose to launch the actual on screen keyboard and start entering your text If in need of advanced editing funtionality like selecting copy ing pasting or skipping characters words sentences or lines hit Edit To return to the keyboard window hit back SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 65 66 4 To save the text you have written click back to return to the main win dow then select Menus to launch a window containing buttons to open any menu from the text editor s menu bar 5 Select File Save as
165. er click OK Applying Filters Filters are applied in the order listed in the dialog accessed with Tools Fil ters Change the order by highlighting a filter and clicking Up or Down Click OK to close the filter dialog when finished Filters are applied to all new mail messages They are not applied to mail already in your folders To apply filters to messages already received select the desired messages then select Actions gt Apply Filters 7 4 Contacts Evolution can use several different address books Available books are listed in the left frame Search for a particular contact using the search bar Add contacts SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD puo ID JA 3 UY uounjo 3 y 123 124 in several formats to the Evolution address book using File Import Right click a contact to open a menu in which to select from a variety of options such as forwarding the contact or saving it as a vCard Double click a contact to edit it File Edit View Actions Tools Search Help New v D a a o Send Receive Print Delete EI Personal 2contacts Name begins with d Clear On This Computer Linux Tux Full Name Tux Linux Full Name Geeko Lizard On LDAP Servers Nickname tux Nickname Geeko Email 1 tux example com Email 1 geeko example com Email 2 tuxathome example com Email 2 geekoathome exampl Business Phone 555 5555 555 Home Address Label 1 Mascot Drive Linux Town 748
166. er on page 3 When you start KMouth for the first time a wizard opens This enables you to specify the command to use to speak the text If you already configured your text to speech system with KTTS this is not necessary The second page lets you select some phrase books A phrase book is a collection of frequently used phrases This has the advantage that the user does not need to type them in KMouth supports different languages and different topics courte ousness greetings How are you and personal You can select all or only one of them With the third page define a dictionary It is used for word completion You can define either the KDE documentation of the respective language or the OpenOf fice org dictionary as a text basis After leaving with Finish KMouth generates the dictionary and opens the main dialog The main dialog shown in Figure H 9 on the current page displays the topics of the phrase books a history of spoken sentences and an edit field To speak type the sentence in the text field or choose it from the list Click Speak File Edit Phrase Books Settings Help Es dy o i J courteousness J oreetings Ho Hello How are you am fine Thanks am fine Thanks SE Speak Ready Figure 4 9 Using KMouth SUSE LINUX doptseq 3d eut 95 96 Improve the application by entering your own sentences in your phrase book Choose Phrase Books gt Edit and a wind
167. es Filters features false color correction switches because some cam eras swap the red and blue channels in transmission If you operate more than one webcam use File Open New Camera to switch to another camera Select the new device from the dialog that opens The first camera is attached to the device dev videoO the second is attached to dev videol and so on 14 6 2 Snapshots To take a snapshot with a camera click Snap Picture Select a filename and pic ture format in the dialog that opens Create a picture series with Camera Set Timer Set the capturing frequency in seconds or minutes along with the proper ties of the images in Set image information An optional script to run after every capture event can be chosen with Run command after snap This could for ex ample be used to upload the captured image onto an FIP server 14 6 3 Command Line gqcam can also be run without its graphical user interface This may be interest ing for instance for automatic surveillance controlled by a cron job This requires 14 6 Webcam Operation with gqcam that all the necessary settings be passed to the application as parameters Run ning gqcam t JPEG s d webcam jpg saves the current image captured by the camera with the filename webcam jpg The option t defines the file format Possible values are JPEG PNG and PPM The command line switch s activates the color correction The f
168. es Security updates are marked in red and are preselected along with the blue recommended patches Accept this proposal to keep your system consistent Click Accept to apply the updates For more information about the YaST Online Update refer to the Administration Guide 904002 4511 1 8 Security If converting to a Linux system from a Microsoft Windows system you proba bly experienced a fair share of trouble caused by multiple kinds of viruses and worms spreading over the Internet via e mail Now that you have made the switch to Linux you can at least put that fear aside because these cannot harm a Linux system as easily as a Windows system As mentioned in Section 1 2 on page 6 Linux knows two different kinds of users a superuser root and normal users root has access to all system resources and is allowed to change all aspects of the system s configuration Switching from your normal user account to root for administrative tasks and switching back for your normal work sounds tedious and perhaps unnecessary because root has ultimate power over the system Still switching back to the normal user ac count after accomplishing the administrative jobs adds to security because any mistake made as root can have severe consequences The whole system might be affected not just the normal user account Thus preserve your system s in tegrity by clearly distinguishing between the different roles normal user and superuser Ke
169. es 195 SSM see steinar eer ph e e AER EE i elegi 1277 SU su cris dain ar eb mita 268 SuSEWatcher eese system messages 1 eee eee eee eee rebooting requirements orirun irina SSeCcury eie ta Eman E SERER EREE s S DVIC S dear aaa Bh tdOWtf ener timeas system administration sss installing applications updates i e deett enn T EE telnet TLDP COP oct ure se ttaderaudes t ens esu ns SE Tarta aan alevt EPG motv AMXMIVEPE iii 201 teletext xawtv4 U umount ea eee eee eee eee eee 265 UpPAated sais dine seta na pire ate 264 USB digital cameras 00045 216 users HCOMCEPE A d H SHOOK engel eene superuser 66 eee cece eee switching esseci erneer near nians na V Vi E one contenant 268 virtual consoles navigating cece eee eee ee 246 W Web browsers s Firefox ice eere 1571164 SUSE LINUX 285 Konqueror 35111524155 q Opera ota alas ES Web pages s archiving erd cores epa eu ut 153 webcams MOV EE
170. es in OpenOffice org When the application is first started it provides Tips short information about buttons when the mouse hovers over them and the Help Agent information based on actions performed To get more extensive information about buttons than the Tips provide use Help What s This then hover over the desired buttons To end What s This mode click If you frequently need this function consider enabling the Extended Tips in Tools gt Options gt OpenOffice org gt General The Help Agent and Tips can also be enabled and disabled here The OpenOffice org Web site is http www openoffice org There find mailing lists articles and bug information This site provides the versions for various operating systems for download 6 6 For More Information Evolution An E Mail and Calendar Program Evolution is a groupware suite that offers regular e mail features along with ex tended features like task lists and a calendar The application also provides a complete address book including the ability to send contact information to oth ers in vCard format 7 1 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs 118 7 2 Evolution Overview 00 0 00002 eee 118 7 3 NAAN ca dia stent E HR a OR dade Au e 120 7 4 Contact e cee ee ee ew e ewe owed 123 7 5 Calendars oue he ite ok Baton QS AS 125 7 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld
171. es of a file use Edit Duplicate For simple cut copy and paste of files use the Edit menu or right click the file icon then selecting the appropriate item from the context menu that appears To rename a file right click it and select Rename Nautilus supports file browsing across a network To connect to a remote server FTP SSH HTTP Samba etc click File Connect to Server You are then 3 3 File Management with Nautilus prompted for the type of server to which to connect and some additional infor mation like the name of the folder to access the port number and the username to use When you leave this dialog with Connect the remote folder is displayed as part of the Places panel menu and appears as a desktop icon For any future connections just select the appropriate item from the Places menu and provide the necessary authentication to log in to these network folders To close these con nections right click the desktop icon and select Unmount Volume Nautilus provides basic CD burning functionality If you created a directory hold ing data you want to back up by just burning it to a CD click Places gt CD Cre ator and drag the folder holding the relevant data onto the CD DVD Creator window Select File gt Write to Disc to copy the data to CD or DVD 3 3 3 Editing MIME Types MIME types determine which application should open a file when
172. es to ses sion if you want to have the exact state of a session restored for the subsequent login With Startup Programs configure any additional programs that should be started on login certain applets or terminals for example The Current Session tab lists all programs that are currently started once a session begins Remove ap plications or change the order in which they are started as desired doptsed 3INON9 SUL 3 3 File Management with Nautilus Nautilus is the file manager and viewer of GNOME The following section pro vides an overview of the basic functions of Nautilus as well as a few tips on its configuration More information can be found in the help pages for Nautilus 3 3 Navigating in Nautilus The standard window of Nautilus is shown in FigureB 2 on the following page The default view of a folder s content is the icon view just featuring an icon and the filename for each file If configured accordingly a preview of the file s content can be provided as described in Section B 3 4 on page 60 When you double click a folder icon a new Nautilus window opens displaying the folder s content If you prefer browser like file navigation switch to the Nautilus browser inter face Right click the folder to browse and choose Browse Folder A new Nautilus window opens providing the normal functionality but with a browser s look and feel To navigate folders and files you can now use the Back Forward
173. et the following advanced options for the archive Add only if newer If the archive already contains a file with the same name the file is only added if it is newer than the one existing in the archive Include subfolders To compress an entire directory activate this option to in clude all subdirectories Exclude backup files Avoid unnecessary data trash by disabling the inclu sion of backup copies when creating an archive Exclude hidden files Usually hidden files do not contain any data that is relevant for the user By default they are not included in the archive to re duce the amount of data Exclude files This explicitly excludes certain files from the archive This option is useful if you want to compress entire directories but exclude certain files from the archive Instead of filenames you can also specify search patterns Ignore case File Roller ignores different capitalizations of filenames and exten sions like JPEG or jpeg After completing the selection and configuration exit the dialog The archive cre ated is available for further processing at the desired location To decompress an archive load it to File Roller click Edit gt Extract to and specify the target di rectory 3 4 Important Utilities 3 5 Assistive Technology Support GNOME offers a number of applications to support users with disabilities These applications include an on screen keyboard GOK a powerful screenread
174. ete Gaim XChat saging IRC ger XChat Gaim Clients Conferencing NetMeeting GnomeMeeting Video and Audio Voice over IP X Lite kphone Skype FTP Clients leechftp wsftp gftp kbear Konqueror Konqueror is a multitalented application created by the KDE de velopers It acts as file manager and document viewer but is also a very powerful and highly customizable Web browser It supports the current Web standards such as CSS 2 Java applets JavaScript and Netscape plug ins Flash and RealVideo DOM and SSL for example It offers neat helpers like an integrated search bar and supports tabbed browsing Book marks can be imported from various other Web browsers like Internet Ex plorer Mozilla and Opera Find more information about Konqueror at http www konqueror org and read our introduction to using Kon queror in Chapter I0 on page 151 Firefox Firefox is the youngest member of the Mozilla browser family It runs on various platforms including Linux MacOS and Windows Its main fea tures include built in customizable searches pop up blocking RSS news feeds password management tabbed browsing and some advanced se SUSE LINUX SIOMIJOS SU OUM OL Buieo NO 35 curity and privacy options Firefox is very flexible allowing you to cus tomize almost anything you want searches toolbars skins buttons etc Neat add ons and extensions can be downloaded from the Firefox Web site https addons update mozilla org
175. event such as an agenda for a meeting SUSE LINUX uJDJ80Jg JOPUSIOD puo IDJA 3 UY ODC 139 140 8 5 2 Adding Calendars Important E p Groupware Calendars The best way to add groupware resources is with a separate tool To use it close Kontact then run groupwarewizard in a command line Select the server type such as SLOX Groupwise or Exchange from the list offered then enter the address and authentication data The wizard then adds the available resources to Kontact Important _ The calendar module can connect to multiple calendars simultaneously This is useful for example to combine a personal calendar with an organizational one To add a new calendar click Add then select the calendar type Complete the necessary fields The check boxes in front of the calendars show the activation status of each To stop display of a calendar without deleting it uncheck it Remove deletes the selected calendar from the list 8 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld Kontact is designed so its data can be synced with handheld devices such as a Palm View information about the status of KPilot in the summary Refer to Chap ter 9on the next page for information about configuring and using KPilot 8 7 For More Information Kontact includes help for itself and its various components Access it with Help gt Kontact Handbook The project s Web page http www kontact org is also informative 8
176. ew window displays a list of all currently available actions along with their keyboard shortcuts Deactivate or change a keyboard shortcut by click ing the corresponding shortcut entry Then enter a new shortcut or delete the cur rent one with Backspace All changes take effect immediately Restore the current keyboard shortcut by clicking its entry and leaving the dialog with Close 3 2 10 Assistive Technology Use this module to activate and configure active technology support for disabled users First globally activate this support via Enable assistive technologies Because this affects various settings of your entire desktop such as mouse and keyboard behavior or font sizes these changes do not take effect until the next time you log in Select the type of support you need Choose from Screenreader Magnifier and On Screen keyboard More information about this topic can be found in Section B 5 on page 65 3 2 11 Sound System Alerts This module allows the association of certain system events and application alerts with characteristic audio signals The dialog box consists of three tabs General Sound Events and System Bell The two check boxes in the Gen eral tab must be activated to use audio signals for certain desktop events In Sound Events determine which events and application alerts should be asso ciated with which sounds All sound associations already defined for
177. f that image Alter nate views are useful for magnifying a part of an image for manipulation while seeing the complete image in another view Adjust the magnification level of the SUSE LINUX dINID OUL UM soiudoio Buyoindiuny 239 240 current window with Zoom When Shrink Wrap is selected the image window is resized to fit the current image display exactly 18 4 Saving Images No image function is as important as File gt Save It is better to save too often than too rarely Use File Save as to save the image with a new filename It is a good idea to save image stages under different names or make backups in another directory so you can easily restore a previous state When saving for the first time or using Save as a dialog opens in which to spec ify the filename and type Enter the filename in the field at the top For Save in folder select the directory in which to save the file from a list of commonly used directories To use a different directory or create a new one open Browse for other folders It is recommended to leave Select File Type set to By Exten sion With that setting GIMP determines the file type based on the extension ap pended to the filename The following file types are frequently useful XCF This is the native format of the application It saves all layer and path infor mation along with the image itself Even if you need an image in another format
178. fer to the brief and clear introduction on the GnuPG project pages at http www gnupg org documentation howtos html en This document also provides a list of further information sources SUSE LINUX Od29 uii uoudAm2u3 173 Part IV Multimedia Sound in Linux Linux includes a wide range of sound and multimedia applications Some of these applications are part of one of the main desktop environments With the ap plications described here control the volume and balance of playback play CDs and music files and record and compress your own audio data 3 1 Mixers WIES Gee ee ae hae bes eo bes d a 178 carta dbadd chek ead 182 133 CDs Playback and Ripping 187 13 4 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity 192 13 5 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files 195 xnu ui PUNOS 178 13 1 Mixers Mixers provide a convenient means of controlling the volume and balance of the sound output and input of computers The main difference between the various mixers is the outer appearance of the user interface However there are a number of mixers that are designed for specific hardware One example is envy24control a mixer for the Envy 24 sound chip Another one is hdspmixer which is for RME Hammerfall cards From the mixers available select the one that best suits your needs Generally it is advisable to open a mixer application before opening other sound applications Use the mixer to
179. file select Settings gt Configure KMail then Identities gt New In the di alog that opens give the new identity a name such as private or office Click OK to proceed to a dialog in which to enter some additional information Under the General tab enter your name organization and e mail address Under Cryptography select your keys to send digitally signed or encrypted messages For the encryption features to work first create a key with KGpg de scribed in Chapter I2 on page 165 Under Advanced you can enter a reply to and a blind carbon copy address choose a dictionary select the folders for drafts and sent messages and define how messages should be sent Under Signature decide if and how each of your messages should be signed with an extra piece of text at the end To activate this select Enable Signature and decide whether the signature should be taken from a file from an input field or from the output of a command When you are fin ished with all your identity settings confirm with OK The settings under Network decide how Kontact receives and sends e mail There are two tabs one each for sending and for receiving mail Many of these SUSE LINUX uJDJ80Jg Jopue o2 puo IDJA 3 UY ODC 133 134 settings vary depending on the system and network in which your mail server is located If you are not sure about the settings or items to select consult your
180. for nonexperts in a procedural manner For ex ample how to configure a DHCP server HOWTOs can be found in the package howto and are installed under usr share doc howto 104 5 4 The Linux Documentation Project 5 4 2 Frequently Asked Questions FAQs frequently asked questions are a series of questions and answers They originate from Usenet newsgroups where the purpose was to reduce continuous reposting of the same basic questions 5 5 Wikipedia the Free Online Encyclopedia Wikipedia is a a multilingual encyclopedia designed to be read and edited by anyone see http en wikipedia org The content of Wikipedia is cre ated by its users and is published under a free license GDFL Any visitors can edit articles which gives the danger of vandalism but this does not repel visitors With over four hundred thousand articles find an answer for nearly every topic 5 6 Guides and Books Linux offers a broad range of guides and books 5 6 1 SUSE Books SUSE provides detailed and informative books the User Guide and Administra tion Guide We provide HTML and PDF versions of our books in different lan guages If you need some basics install the User Guide from the packages suselinux userguide XXand suselinux userguide XX pdf replace XX with your preferred language For the Administration Guide the package names are suselinux adminguide XXand suselinux adminguide XX pdf 5 6 2 Other Manuals The SUSE help c
181. forts Without them this distribution would not exist Additional thanks go to Frank Zappa and Pawar Special thanks of course to Linus Torvalds Have a lot of fun Your SUSE Team SUSE LINUX Contents I Introducing Linux 1 1 First Contact 3 11 Logging nand Qut ssc creat eee 4 1 1 1 Introducing GDM ooo oo coco 4 112 Introducing KDM o o o oo oo ooo o 5 12 The User Concept of Linux o ooo o 6 L3 Re EREECHEN 7 13 1 Desktop Terminology 7 13 2 Configuring Desktop Components 10 13 3 Little Helpers si es aea eS ee rmm ae X oben 13 134 Switching USers o gt s a ooo ooo em 14 14 File Management 15 EE 15 142 Different Flavors of Your File Manager 16 143 S arching Files ss sasso camara Rr Rx 16 15 Applications uge e 4 mk Bee dO se bod eh ee A eee 17 1 6 Pride eoe e as e u a e a A ess 18 16 1 Managing Print Jobs in GNOME 18 162 Managing Print Jobs in KDE 18 1 7___ Basic Administrative Tasks 22 viii 17 1 Installing New Applications ss 17 2 Retrieving and Applying Software Updates L8 Security eee NO 19 Networking and Mobility o oo oo 191 Networking i veng oo m d Re tibia 192 MobileComputing llle 110 UsingtheShell llle Ce xU ES E Red X A vids 9 22 Network soi e a E RO RUE Ew E
182. g with OK to send the signed e mail To sign other e mail messages in the course of this session without needing to unlock the secret key repeatedly activate Remember this password for the remainder of this session When you receive signed e mail from other users a small padlock icon appears at the end of the message If you click this symbol Evolution starts an external SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld JOPUSIOD puo ID JA 3 UY uounjo 3 y 121 122 program gpg to check the signature If the signature is valid a green check mark appears next to the padlock symbol If the signature is invalid a broken padlock appears The encryption and decryption of e mail is just as easy After composing the e mail message go to Security PGP encrypt and send the e mail message When you receive encrypted messages a dialog opens to ask for the password of your secret key Enter the passphrase to decrypt the e mail message 7 3 4 Folders It is often convenient to sort e mail messages into a variety of folders Your folder tree is shown in the left frame If accessing mail over IMAP the IMAP folders are also shown in this folder bar For POP and most other formats your folders are stored locally sorted under Local Folders Several folders are included by default Inbox is where new messages fetched from a server are initially placed Sent is used for saving copies of sent e mail messages Outbox i
183. ging Files Now that you know what a command looks like which directories exist in SUSE LINUX and how to speed up things when using Bash put this knowledge into practice with a small exercise 1 Open a console from the KDE desktop by clicking the shell icon 2 Enter the 1s command to see the contents of your home directory 3 Use the command mkdir which stands for make directory to create a new subdirectory called test by entering mkdir test 4 Now launch the Kate editor by pressing and entering kate in the input field Type a few letters in the editor then save the file as Test file in your home directory Linux distinguishes between uppercase and lower case For this example use an uppercase T 5 View the contents of your home directory again Instead of typing 1s again just press 7 twice and the 1s command should reappear at the prompt To execute the command hit Enter The newly created directory test should appear in blue letters and Test file in black This is how directories and files can be distinguished in a console SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM BUMOM 249 250 6 Move Testfile into the subdirectory test with the command mv To speed this up use the expansion function just enter mv T and press Tab As long as there is no other file beginning with this letter in the directory the shell expands the filename and adds the string estfile Otherwise add a letter or two yourself and test each time to see whether
184. gs Configure Konqueror and open the section File Associations If you are search ing for an extension use Find filename pattern Only file types with a matching file pattern appear in the list For example to modify the application for MP3 files enter mp3 and see an en try x mp3 After a left click the setting dialog opens on the right side for this file type You can change the icon the filename patterns a description and the order of the applications If your tool is not listed press Add and enter its command Sometimes the order of the list entries is inappropriate To change it click the pro gram to move then give it a higher or lower priority with Move Up or Move Down The application listed at the top is used by default if you click a file of this type Sometimes you need a file type that is not in the list With Add open a dialog box in which to select a group and enter a type name The group determines the main type for example audio image text or video Usually your file type can be SUSE LINUX 79 80 assigned to one of those In Type name name your file type After clicking Ok determine the extensions of the filename Put a description in the text field and decide which application to use Approve with Ok 4 3 3 The Konqueror Menu Location Using Location open additional Konqueror windows If you click New Window your home directory is d
185. gt First Run Wizard xnu ui PUNOS Playlist amarok Actions Playlist Tools Settings Help Toor 7 E1 O Be E E Title Artist Album Length E Artist Album E Gatekeeper Feist Let It Die 2 16 8 le fi Feist BTS FER Let It pS a Let It Die Let It Die Felst Let It Die r Gatekeeper One Evening Feist Let It Dre Mishabuom Leisure Suite Feist Let It Die o Lonely Lonely Feist Let It Die Let It Die a GE When Was A Young Girl Feist Let it Die fO mms scope xmms enm A O mms spectrum xmms Secret Heart Feist Let It Die Leisure Suite O ncer xmms O nebulus libvisual O og spectrum xmms O oinksie libvisual O plazma libvisual Inside And Out Feist Let It Die Tout Doucement Feist Let It Die Now At Last Feist Let It Die J mi coraz n me recuerda lila downs border la Lonely Lonely When I Was A Young Secret Heart Inside And Out Tout Doucement corazoncito tirano lila downs border la O plazma Now At Last El sanalyzer DEES SES border la linea mi coraz n me recuer O synaesthesia el feo sale sobrando Spectrum analyze amaroK O lila downs corazoncito tirano border 20 00 00 liis 112 kbps 44 kHz Po Ea LR eer Figure 13 4 The amaroK Media Player SUSE LINUX 183 Managing Playlists On start up amaroK scans the file system for multimedia files according to t
186. gures itself In this example the Festival Interactive talker is added to the list To config ure it select it and go to Edit A dialog box like that in Figure 4 8 on the current page appears In it select the voice if more than one is available set the volume speed and pitch and test it Approve with OK Festival Interactive Configuration Festival executable Jusr bin festival ra Select voice American Male kal diphone e Rescan Volume 100 96 P Speed 100 967 Pith 100967 Character encoding ISO 8859 1 e Load this voice when starting KTTSD Test Help Defaults X Cancel Figure 4 8 Configuring Talkers KTTS has some additional tabs With General enable or disable the text to speech service Notifications are messages routed from application to the KDE notification system You can configure it with Speak notifications KNotify To embed KTTS in the system tray check the respective option 4 4 Important Utilities The Talker tab was already explained above In Audio choose between aRts and GStreamer two sound systems Jobs gives an overview of your current speech jobs You can pause resume restart remove or change the order of the jobs KMouth Speak Text with KDE KMouth is a program designed to speak for those who cannot You must have installed and configured a speech synthesizer as described in Section KTTS The KDE Text to Speech Manag
187. h is represented here by the string set set Matches one character other than those identified by set Assuming that your test directory contains the files Test file Testfilel Testfile2 and datafile the command 1s Testfile lists the files Testfilel and Testfile2 With 1s Test the list also includes Test file ls fil shows all the sample files Finally you can use the set wild card to address all sample files whose last character is a number 1s Testfile 1 9 Of the four types of wild cards the most inclusive one is the asterisk It could be used to copy all files contained in one directory to another one or to delete all files with one command The command rm il for instance would delete all files in the current directory whose name includes the string fil SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM 8uptoM 251 252 19 1 6 Less and More Linux includes two small programs for viewing text files directly in the shell Rather than starting an editor to read a file like Readme t xt simply enter less Readme txt to display the text in the console window Use to scroll down one page Use Page Up and Page Down to move forward or backward in the text To exit less press Q Instead of less you can also use the older program more However it is less con venient because it does not allow you to scroll backwards The program less got its name from the the precept that less is more and can also be used to view the outp
188. have a height and width ratio of 4 3 These proportions can be set with Tools gt Screen Dimensions If 4 3 is selected here this is the default setting the screen dimensions are retained automatically even when the display size is changed With or Tools gt Fullscreen switch to full screen mode If the TV image in full screen mode is not scaled to the full monitor size some fine tuning is re quired Many graphics cards can scale the full screen mode television image to the full monitor size without changing the graphical mode If your card does not support this function the graphics mode must be switched to 640x480 for the full screen mode Create the related configuration in Settings gt Configuration After restarting motv the monitor mode is also changed if you have switched to full screen mode SUSE LINUX UJO2Qq9M PUD Opol O9plA AL 199 Storing the Configuration in xawtv The xawtv file is created automatically and updated by clicking Set tings gt Save settings Here the broadcasters are saved along with the configuration More information about the configuration file can be found in the man page for xawtvrc Tip 14 1 4 The Launcher Menu Use the launcher menu to start other applications to use with motv Start the au dio mixer gamix and the video text application alevt for example using a key board shortcut Applications to launch from mot
189. he Run Application terminal Profile Management Your system needs to adapt to changing operating environments when used for mobile computing A lot of services depend on the environment and the under lying clients must be reconfigured Use the system configuration profile manage ment SCPM framework to create different configuration profiles for all environ ments your machine is used in Change the active profile using Profile Chooser To modify your SCPM settings select Select YaST Profile Manager Module and enter the root password when prompted to do so Start Profile Chooser in KDE using the main menu In GNOME enter profile chooser at the Run Appli cation terminal 904002 SI 1 10 Using the Shell Most tasks in Linux can be conveniently handled via a graphical user interface Some tasks mainly system administrator s ones can be handled more efficiently on the command line from a terminal or shell A basic understanding of how a Linux shell works and knowledge of some basic command line tools is required for this Refer to Chapter 19 on page 245 to get to know the Bash shell and some Linux command line tools SUSE LINUX _______ 29 Getting to Know Linux Software Linux comes with a wealth of applications often offering more than one solution to your specific problems The difficulty is finding the one application that suits your needs and offers a similar ease of use compared to the Windows or Mac ap plic
190. he official text editor of the GNOME desktop It provides simi lar features to Kate Find more information at http www gnome org projects gedit X Emacs GNU Emacs and XEmacs are very professional editors XEmacs is based on GNU Emacs To quote the GNU Emacs Manual Emacs is the ex tensible customizable self documenting real time display editor Both offer nearly the same functionality with minor differences Used by expe rienced developers they are highly extensible through the Emacs Lisp lan guage They support many languages like Russian Greek Japanese Chi nese and Korean Find more information at http www xemacs org and http www gnu org software emacs emacs html vim vim vi improved is a program similar to the text editor vi Users may need time to adjust to vim because it distinguishes between command mode and insert mode The basic features are the same as in all text editors vim of fers some unique options like macro recording file format detection and SUSE LINUX SIOMIJOS SU OUM OL Buieo 43 44 conversion multiple buffers in a screen and much more Find more infor mation at http www vim org or in our Administration Guide GOCR GOCR is an OCR optical character recognition tool It converts scanned images of text into text files It is also one part of Kooka a KDE scanning tool Find more information at http jocr sourceforge net and in Chapter 17 on page227 gzip tar bzip2
191. he settings made in the wizard The right part of the playlist window lists any playlists found Play titles listed in it in the order of your choice If no playlist is found create one The best way to do this is by using the sidebar to the left of the window To the far left there are a number of tabs that can be used to open dif ferent views From each of these views drag individual titles or entire directories and drop them into the playlist to include them in the list The following is a de scription of the function of each tab Context With this tab view information about your collection and the current artist For example the view informs you about your favorite titles the newest titles added to the collection and other details The Home view provides statistics on your listening habits listing your favorite newest and least played tracks Current Track provides data related to the track currently being played such as the album cover see Section The Cover Manager on the facing page the listening statistics related to this track and much more If you are interested in the lyrics of the track display them using the Lyrics tab Collection Browser Use this view to manage and display your personal collec tion of titles The collection view may include files from different locations The wrench icon in the toolbar lets you determine what locations should be scanned for music files Once you select the directories the s
192. hone numbers Categories can be used to sort addresses De tails contains more specific information such as birthday and spouse s name If your contact uses an instant messenger you can add these identities in IM Ad dresses If you do this and have Kopete or another KDE chat program running at the same time as Kontact view status information about these identities in Kon tact In Crypto Settings enter the contact s encryption data such as public key Misc has additional information such as a photograph and the location of the user s Free Busy information Use Custom Fields to add your own information to the contact or address book Contacts can also be imported in a variety of formats Use File gt Import and select the desired format Then select the file to import SUSE LINUX uJDJ80Jg Jopue o2 puo IDJA 3 UY ODC 137 138 8 4 2 Making a List If you frequently send e mail messages to a group of people make this easier by creating a list First click Settings gt Show Extension Bar gt Distribution List Editor In the new section that appears click New List Enter a name for the list then click OK Add contacts to the list by dragging them from the address list and dropping them in the distribution list window Use this list like regular contacts when creating a mail 8 4 3 Adding Address Books E Important Groupware Address Books The best way to a
193. hostname IP address The ping command is the standard tool for testing the basic functionality of TCP IP networks It sends a small data packet to the destination host requesting an immediate reply If this works ping displays a message to that effect which indicates that the network link is basically functioning c number Determines the total number of packages to send and ends after they have been dispatched by default there is no limitation set flood ping sends as many data packages as possible a popular means reserved for root to test networks i value Specifies the interval between two data packages in seconds default one second nslookup The domain name system resolves domain names to IP addresses With this tool send queries to information servers DNS servers telnet option s hostname or IP address Port Telnet is actually an Internet protocol that enables you to work on remote hosts across a network telnet is also the name of a Linux program that uses this protocol to enable operations on remote computers SUSE LINUX ______ 267 268 E Warning Do not use telnet over a network on which third parties can eaves drop Particularly on the Internet use encrypted transfer methods such as ssh to avoid the risk of malicious misuse of a password see the man page for ssh Warning zl Miscellaneous passwd option s username Users may change their own passwords at any time using this command
194. hree dimensional photo realistic images using a rendering technique called ray tracing Because there is a Windows version of POV Ray it does not take much for Windows users to switch to the Linux version of this application Find more informa tion about POV Ray at http www povray org Blender Blender is a powerful rendering and animation tool available on many platforms including Windows MacOS and Linux Find more information about Blender at http www blender3d com Digikam Digikam is a smart digital photo management tool for the KDE desk top Importing and organizing your digital images is a matter of a few clicks Create albums add tags to spare you from copying images around different subdirectories and eventually export your images to your own Web site Find more information about Digikam at http digikam sourceforge net Digikam SPIP or refer to Chapter 16 on page 215 gThumb gThumb is an image viewer browser and organizer for the GNOME desktop It supports the import of your digital images via gphoto2 allows you to carry out basic transformation and modifications and lets you tag your images to create albums matching certain categories Find more infor mation about gThumb at http gthumb sourceforge net Kooka Kooka is a scan and OCR suite for the KDE desktop It allows you to con figure the main scan parameters choose from various export formats and organize the scanned data The OCR module provided by the K
195. icks that the system should interpret as a double click The appearance and size of the cursor can be changed under the Cursor tab Three different settings are available Changes are not activated until the next lo gin Under Locate Pointer activate an option that causes the cursor to be high lighted when you press Ctr making it easier to find Under Motion set the ac celeration and sensitivity of the screen cursor and the drag and drop threshold 3 2 3 Menus and Toolbars The settings in this module affect the menus and toolbars of all GNOME compatible applications Select for toolbar icons to be displayed as Text Only 3 2 Settings Icons Only Text Beside Icons or Text Below Icons The default setting is Text below icons Activate Detachable toolbars to allow the detachment of the toolbar from all other window elements and allow its free positioning on the desktop This makes a grabbing area appear on the left side of the toolbar Clicking and holding this area relocates the toolbar Every menu entry in any application menu can be displayed with the corre sponding icon Activating Show icons in menus tests the settings with the pro vided example menu 3 2 4 Windows doptsed JWONSD SUL This module controls the behavior of application windows Determine how the window should react to contact with the mouse pointer or to double clicks on its title and define the key
196. ides detailed information about configuring and using the program 242 18 6 For More Information Part V Excursions Working with the Shell Graphical user interfaces are increasingly becoming important for Linux but us ing the mouse is not always the best way to perform daily tasks The command line provides high flexibility and efficiency The first part of this chapter provides an introduction to the Bash shell It is followed by an explanation of the user per mission concept in Linux and a list of the most important commands The chapter closes with a description of the vi text editor 19 4 Introduction to Bash 246 19 2 Users and Access Permissions 255 193 Important Linux Commands 260 194 TheviEditor 268 IOUS eut ut 8uptoM 246 Text based applications are especially important for controlling older Linux com puters that do not have the resources for demanding display systems Virtual consoles are used in this case Six of them are available in text mode Press Alf FD through AIfKF6 The seventh console is reserved for X 19 1 Introduction to Bash In the KDE taskbar there is an icon depicting a monitor with a seashell When you click this icon a console window opens in which to enter commands The console normally runs Bash Bourne again shell a program developed as part of the GNU project Once you have opened the shell
197. ight part of the window If you want to in stall one of these packages select the check box next to the package s name and click Accept YaST automatically resolves all package dependencies if there is any additional software component required to run the application chosen YaST automatically installs the missing package To finish YaST runs some scripts to update the system configuration Leave YaST and your freshly installed applica tion is ready to run For a detailed description of the YaST software module refer to the Administration Guide 1 7 2 Retrieving and Applying Software Updates Make sure that your system is up to date and contains the recent software and security fixes by constantly running SUSEWatcher If configured accordingly it automatically informs you about the availability of any software updates see also Section 1 3 3Jon pagel 13 Launch the YaST Online Update and provide the root password Select an appropriate installation source and hit Next A dialog similar to the one in Section 1 7 1Jon the current page opens showing all patches that are available for update SUSE patches may fall in any of the following three categories security security sensitive patches that should always be installed to maintain a secure system recommended improvements to packages already 1 7 Basic Administrative Tasks installed and other other patches available for update not relevant to any of your installed packag
198. iguration options File contains the option for printing the cur rently displayed content Under Edit access the search function Go con tains all navigation possibilities Table of Contents home page of the Help Center Back Forward and Last Search Result With Settings gt Build Search Index generate a search index for all selected information sources The toolbar contains three navigation icons forward back home and a printer icon for printing the current contents Navigation Area with Tabs The navigation area in the left part of the window provides an input field for a quick search in selected information sources Details regarding the search and the configuration of the search function in the Search tab are presented in Section 5 1 2Jon the next page The Con tents tab presents a tree view of all available and currently installed infor mation sources Click the book icons to open and browse the individual cat egories View Window The view window always displays the currently selected con tents such as online manuals search results or Web pages 5 1 1 Contents The SUSE Help Center provides access to useful information from various sources It contains special documentation for SUSE LINUX User Guide and Administration Guide all available information sources for your workstation environment online help for the installed programs and help texts for other ap
199. ilename for saving is passed with the option d If more than one webcam is operated the name of the device must be passed If no de vice is given the default device dev videoO is used To capture an image from the second camera the option v dev videol must be added List all options with gqcam help SUSE LINUX UJOOGgOSM PUD oppo OSplA AL 207 K3b The KDE Burning Application K3b is a comprehensive program for writing data and audio CDs and DVDs Start the program from the main menu or by entering the command k3b The following sections brief you on how to start a basic burning process to get your first Linux made CD or DVD Hue E 210 EE 212 To 213 vcr 213 155 ForMorelnformationl lesen 213 uouooiddy Buluing 3C Sul aqey Cn 210 15 1 Creating a Data CD To create a data CD go to File gt New Project gt New Data Project The project view appears in the lower part of the window as shown in Figure 15 1 on this page Drag the desired directories or individual files from your home di rectory to the project folder and drop them there Save the project under a name of your choice with File gt Save as File Project Plugins Tools Settings Help ire 39 9365 Zell SS Rx Rx HL DT ST D all bin B it o Home ei de B Pictures bin Desktop aj public html Gade _ Documents lE en 3 Desktop la pa E Documents ES fr en Bes 10600 Filter All Files V
200. iles for the C compiler usr share doc various documentation files usr share man system manual pages man pages usr src source code of system software usr src linux kernelsource code tmp var tmp temporary files usr allapplication programs var configuration files such as those linked from usr var log system log files var adm system administration data lib shared libraries for dynamically linked programs proc process file system sys system file system where all device information for the kernel is gath ered usr local local distribution independent extensions opt optional software larger add on program packages such as KDE GNOME Netscape 248 19 1 Introduction to Bash 19 1 3 Bash Functions There are two important functions of the shell that can make your work a lot eas ler History To repeat a command that has been entered before press 1 until the previous command appears at the prompt Move forward through the list of previously entered commands by pressing 1 To edit the command line just move the cursor to the desired position using the arrow keys and start typing Use to search in the history Expansion Expand a filename to its full length after typing its first letters until it can be uniquely identified To do so type the first letters then hit Tab If there are several filenames starting with the same letters obtain a list of them by hitting Tab twice First Example Mana
201. image should be in color RGB or Grayscale Select the Fill Type for the new image Foreground Color and Background Color use the colors selected in the toolbox White uses a white background in the image Transparent creates a clear image Transparency is represented by a gray checkerboard pattern Enter a comment for the new image in Comment When the settings meet your needs press OK To restore the default settings press Reset Pressing Cancel aborts creation of a new image 18 3 2 Opening an Existing Image To open an existing image select File gt Open or press Ctrl In the dialog that opens select the desired file Click OK to open the selected image Press Cancel to skip opening an image 18 3 3 The Image Window The new or opened image appears in its own window The menu bar in the top of the window provides access to all image functions Alternatively access the menu by right clicking the image or clicking the small arrow button in the left corner of the rulers File offers the standard file options such as Save and Print Close closes the current image Quit closes the entire application With the items in the View menu control the display of the image and the im age window New View opens a second display window of the current image Changes made in one view are reflected in all other views o
202. ime priority During the recording the currently used buffer size is displayed in the status line un der Buffer and the maximum buffer size required so far for this recording is dis played under Peak SUSE LINUX ob File About File tmp take01 wav Time 0 00 00 II Capture Record Pause Stop Buffer Peak Figure 13 12 QARecord A Simple Hard Disk Recording Application 196 135 Direct Recording and Playback of WAV Files TV Video Radio and Webcam This chapter introduces some basic Linux video radio and webcam applications Learn how to configure and use motv for watching analog TV using a webcam and browsing video text Use xawtv4 for digital video broadcasts Webcams can be run using gqcam EPG information can be accessed using nxtvepg or xawtv4 141 Watching TV with mot 198 142 Video Text Support 200 Tor T 201 ee 201 145 Watching Digital Video Broadcasts with xawtv4 203 14 6 Webcam Operation with oeocam 205 UJO2Q9M PUD Opo OSPA AL 14 1 Watching TV with motv motv is an improved successor to xawtv It incorporates all essential functions into the user interface Start the application with Multimedia gt Video gt motv Start it at the command line with mot v Initially only a TV window ap pears after the application starts Open a menu window by right clicking it 591 25 MHz 36 Arte 4 Figure 14 1 The TV A
203. imple Commands of the vi Editor ESC Changes to last line mode i Changes to insert mode characters appear at the current x cursor position a a Changes to insert mode characters appear after the lt current cursor position gt A Changes to insert mode characters are added at the end of the line gt R Changes to command mode overwrites the old text a Y Changes to insert mode and overwrites each character a S Changes to insert mode the character where the cursor is positioned is replaced by the next entry you make e Changes to insert mode the rest of the line is replaced by the new text o Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted after the current one O Changes to insert mode a new line is inserted before the current one x Deletes the current character dd Deletes the current line dw Deletes up to the end of the current word cw Changes to insert mode the rest of the current word is overwritten by the next entries you make Undoes the last command Joins the following line with the current one Repeats the last command Changes to last line mode The most important commands in command mode are shown in Table on this page Each command can be preceded by a number specifying on how many objects the following command should operate Delete three words at once by SUSE LINUX 269 270 entering 3dw The command 10x deletes ten characters after the cursor position and 20dd de
204. inting from Firefox 11 7 For More Information 12 Encryption with KGpg 121 Generating a New Key Pair 2 2 2 llle 122 Exporting the Public ke 123 Importing Keys 123 1 Signing Keys 1232 Trusting Keys 12 4 The Key Server Dialog 12 4 1 Importing a Key from a Key Server 124 2 Exporting Your Keys to a Key Server 125 Text and File Encryption 2 2 ooo ooo o 12 5 1 Encrypting and Decrypting the Clipboard 12 5 2 Encrypting and Decrypting by Dragging and Dropping 1253 TheKGpgEditor eee ee ee 12 6 For More Information Contents 157 158 159 159 159 159 159 160 160 160 160 161 162 162 163 164 164 IV Multimedia 175 177 13 1 Mixers s eio cmm eR Rp eye enm a et 178 itt bhedebetedseGewesak sheathed bn ee 178 13 1 2 The GNOME Mixer Applet lt 178 13 13 alsamixer aoaaa 179 b ager as dte a at 180 13 1 5 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 181 itp eS Qh a SOS ue D ee We eh ale kes 182 ee eA te EM a a a a a ee ee Ge 182 32 2 MME eR Rm Rmo dee eo a Eo 186 133 CDs Playback and Ripping llle 187 T amp Ee ee 188 13 32 GNOME CD Player Applet 188 GA BAM We RBS m dede tel ER GG 189 13 4 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity o 192 KENET 192 bs eis EE SE E E EA 193 13 4 3 Saving and Exporting 195 OEE IETEN 195 197 EE EE 198 14 1 1 Vid
205. ional programs rapidly The Ot library is available not only for Linux but for a number of Unixes and even for Windows and Macintosh Thus it is possible to write programs that can be easily ported to those platforms Find more information at http www trolltech com GTK GTK is a multiplatform toolkit for creating graphical user interfaces It is used for all GNOME applications The GIMP and several others GTK has been designed to support a range of languages not only C C Originally it was written for GIMP hence the name GIMP Toolkit Find more infor mation at http www gtk org SUSE LINUX SIOMIJOS SU OUM OL Buieo 45 46 CVS CVS the Concurrent Versions System is one of the most important ver sion control systems for Open Source It is a front end to the Revision Con trol System RCS included in the standard Linux distributions Read more about CVS in our Administration Guide Find more information at the home page http www cvshome org Subversion Subversion does the same thing CVS does but has major enhance ments like moving renaming and attaching meta information to files and directories Read more about Subversion in our Administration Guide or go to the home page http subversion tigris org Mono The Mono Project is an open development initiative that is working to de velop an Open Source Unix version of the NET development platform Its objective is to enable Unix developers to build and deploy c
206. ions in the file system differs for files and directories File permission information can be displayed with the com mand 1s 1 The output could appear as in Example on this page Example 19 1 Sample Output Showing File Permissions rw r 1 tux project3 14197 Jun 21 15 03 Roadmap As shown in the third column this file belongs to user tux It is assigned to the group pro ject3 To discover the user permissions of the Roadmap file the first column must be examined more closely SUSE LINUX ______ 255 rw r Type Users Permissions Group Permissions Permissions for Other Users This column is comprised of one leading character followed by nine charac ters grouped in threes The first of the ten letters stands for the type of file system component The hyphen shows that this is a file A directory d a link 1 a block device b or a character device could also be indicated The next three blocks follow a standard pattern The first three characters refer to whether the file is readable r or not A win the middle portion symbolizes that the corresponding object can be edited and a hyphen means it is not possible to write to the file An x in the third position de notes that the object can be executed Because the file in this example is a text file and not one that is executable executable access for this particular file is not needed In this example tux has as owner of the file Roadmap read r and
207. ircle 11 gt Pressure sensitivity I Fade out Incremental T Use color from gradient Figure 18 1 The Main Window SUSE LINUX AINID eu UM sordos Buyoindiuny 237 238 The current foreground and background color are shown in two overlapping boxes The default colors are black for the foreground and white for the back ground Click the box to open a color selection dialog Swap the foreground and background color with the bent arrow symbol to the upper right of the boxes Use the black and white symbol to the lower left to reset the colors to the default To the right the current brush pattern and gradient are shown Click the dis played one to access the selection dialog The lower portion of the window con tains allows configuration of various options for the current tool Layers Channels Paths Undo In the first section use the drop down box to select the image to which the tabs refer By clicking Auto control whether the active image is chosen automatically By default Auto is enabled Layers shows the different layers in the current images and can be used to ma nipulate the layers Channels shows and can manipulate the color channels of the image Paths are an advanced method of selecting parts of an image They can also be used for drawing Paths shows the paths available for an image and provides access to path functions Undo shows a limited history of modifications made to the curr
208. is makes it an excellent tool when a group of users frequently need to share files and do not use the same system on their computers 6 2 Word Processing with Writer There are two ways to create a new document To create a document from scratch use File gt New gt Text Document To use a standard format and pre defined elements for your own documents try a wizard Wizards are small utili ties that let you make some basic decisions then produce a ready made document from a template For example to create a business letter select File Wizards gt Letter Using the wizard s dialogs easily create a basic document using a standard format A sample wizard dialog is shown in Figure 6 2Jon page 113 Enter text in the document window as desired Use the Formatting toolbar or the Format menu to adjust the appearance of the document Use the File menu SUSE LINUX ene eoyjo 610 eoyouedo eu 111 File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help Baas AAA SR cH Asa o AS GA an A Default Nimbus Roman No9 L gt 20 Li ES 3 E E E er ri cedecesnos EE BE Cee ee YAS Se Ain se Hello world llel a gt Page 1 1 Default 100 INSRT STD HYF Figure 6 1 The OpenOffice org Writer or the relevant buttons in the toolbar to print and save your document With the options under Insert add extra items to your document such as
209. isplayed in a new window Dupli cate Window produces a second window with the same content You can also send a file or a link using the browser function by e mail If you click one of these menu items the KMail composer opens Specify the recipient and compose a text Depending on the selected item the file is already at tached or the link is displayed in the e mail body You can also print directly from this menu Edit Most items under Edit only become active if you select an object in the main window Apart from the standard editing functions like cutting copying pasting renaming moving to the trash and deleting there is also the Create New item which can be used to create directories files and de vices Another item in the Edit menu lets you view and change the prop erties of files and directories and their permissions With it grant or deny the owner a group or all users read write and execute permissions In the main window select one or several files by moving the mouse pointer over them while keeping the left mouse button pressed or using Selection Select View Use the View menu to change views If a directory has many objects Go in it the text view or the tree view may be more efficient To view HTML pages activate Use index html If a directory contains a file with this name Konqueror loads and displays it To influence the way in which the
210. ist in the left frame Use the search bar to search the messages in a folder If desired click a table header for the message list to sort the messages by that header The sort can be 7 1 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs File Edit View Actions Tools Search Help 3 New e E amp E a a ge g o Send Receive Reply Reply to All Forward Move Copy Print Delete Junk Mot Junk O Sent 1 sent Subject or Sender contains 7 d Clear On This Computer EJE Ce eee Moe J Inbox OA AT CIA ME COIT REN Grafts C Junk BH outbox E Trash 8 E From Tux Linux lt tux example com gt vFolders To geeko example com Unmatched Subject Hi Date Thu 03 Mar 2005 10 39 11 0100 How are things going EA Mail 3 Contacts El Calendars Tasks Exchange Figure 7 1 The Evolution Window with Mail either ascending or descending as shown by the arrow to the right Click the header until the correct direction is displayed 7 2 2 Contacts This view shows all the addresses in your address book To locate a particular ad dress use the search bar or click the button to the right displaying the first letter of the contact s last name Add contacts or lists with the toolbar 7 2 3 Calendar The initial display shows a day view of the current day with the month and a task list shown in an additional pane to the right Week work week and month views are also available from the toolbar or the
211. item proceed as follows Procedure 4 1 Inserting New Entries in Your Wallet 1 You can add a new entry to Maps or Passwords only Use Maps if you have key and value pairs Passwords can contain multiline entries Right click the respective folder entry A dialog box appears and prompts for a name of the new entry Name your entry and approve it with Ok Your new entry is sorted under your folder entry Click the new entry to display it on the right side Initially it is empty Insert a new key and value pair with a right click and choose New Entry All entries are shown in a table view Name your key Activate Show values to view the value row Click to write into the cell Store your modifications with Save SUSE LINUX _______ 85 86 You can always change your password with File Change Password Advanced Features You probably do not need to pay very much attention to KWallet It resides silently in the panel and is automatically activated if needed One nice feature of KWallet is that you can move your wallet files to another computer for example to your laptop To simplify this task wallets can be dragged from the manager window to a file browser window For example save it on a USB stick and carry your passwords with you 4 4 3 The Download Manager KGet KGet is the download manager for KDE It manages your transfers in a window Sto
212. ith less Just like the standard output the standard error output is sent to the console as well However to redirect the standard error output to a file named errors append 2 gt errors to the corresponding command Both standard output 19 1 Introduction to Bash and standard error are saved to one file named alloutput if you append amp alloutput Finally to append the output of a command to an already existing file the command must be followed by gt gt instead of a single gt 19 1 8 Archives and Data Compression Now that you have already created a number of files and directories consider the subject of archives and data compression Suppose you want to have the entire test directory packed in one file that you can save on a floppy disk as a backup copy or send by e mail To do so use the command t ar for tape archiver With tar help view all the options for the tar command The most important of these options are explained here IOUS eut UM 8uptoM c for create Create a new archive t for table Display the contents of an archive x for extract Unpack the archive v for verbose Show all files on screen while creating the archive f for file Choose a filename for the archive file When creating an archive this option must always be given as the last one To pack the test directory with all its files and subdirectories into an archive named testarchive tar use the options c and f For testing p
213. itional browsers it is not necessary to recreate your bookmarks File gt Import Netscape Bookmarks in 10 4 Bookmarks the bookmark editor enables you to integrate your Netscape and Mozilla book marks into your most current collection The reverse is also possible via Export as Netscape Bookmarks Change your bookmarks by right clicking the entry A pop up menu appears in which to select the desired action cut copy delete etc When you are satis fied with the result save the bookmarks with File gt Save If you only want to change the name or link just right click the entry in the bookmark toolbar and select Properties Change the name and location and confirm with Update To save your bookmark list and have instant access to it make your bookmarks visible in Konqueror Select Settings gt Toolbars gt Bookmark Toolbar Kon queror A bookmark panel is automatically displayed in the current Konqueror window 10 5 Java and JavaScript Do not confuse these two languages Java is an object oriented platform independent programming language from Sun Microsystems It is frequently used for small programs applets which are executed over the Internet for things like online banking chatting and shopping JavaScript is an interpreted scripting language mainly used for the dynamic structuring of Web pages for example for menus and other effects Konqueror allows you
214. ive list of supported cameras is available at http www gphoto org If gphoto2 is installed retrieve the list with the command gphoto2 list cameras Get information about the available commands with gphoto2 help Tip Unsupported Cameras If you do not find your camera in the list from gphoto do not despair It is likely that your camera is supported as a USB mass storage device Find more information in Section on the current page Tip 16 1 Connecting to the Camera The fastest and most convenient way to connect digital cameras to the computer is USB provided the kernel the camera and the computer support it The stan dard SUSE kernel provides this support A suitable cable is also required Simply connect the camera to the USB port and turn on the camera You may need to switch your camera to a special data transfer mode For this procedure consult the manual of your digital camera 16 2 Accessing the Camera There are three possibilities for accessing the pictures on the camera It depends on your camera and which protocol it supports Usually it is USB mass storage which is handled by the hotplug system PTP Picture Transfer Protocol and some proprietary protocols by gphoto2 The easiest way is if your camera supports USB mass storage Read the documen tation of your camera if you are unsure if this is possible Some support two pro tocols like both PTP and USB mass storage Unfortunately there are
215. l KAddressbook KOrganizer and KPilot to form an entity providing all the PIM functionality you need Find more information about Kontact at http www kontact org and read our introduction to using Kontact in Chapter B on page 129 Kopete Kopete is a very intuitive and easy to use instant messenger tool sup porting protocols including IRC ICO AIM GroupWise Messenger Ya hoo MSN and Jabber Find more information about Kopete at http kopete kde org and read an introduction to using Kopete in Section 4 8 on page 91 Gaim Gaim is a smart instant messenger program supporting multiple proto cols like AIM and ICQ Oscar protocol MSN Messenger Yahoo IRC Jab ber SILC and GroupWise Messenger It is possible to log in to different ac 2 2 Network counts on different IM networks and chat on different channels simultane ously Gaim also exists in a Windows version Find more information about Gaim at http gaim sourceforge net about php XChat XChat is an IRC client that runs on most Linux and UNIX platforms as well as under Windows and MacOS X Find more information about XChat athttp www xchat org GnomeMeeting GnomeMeeting is the Open Source equivalent of Microsoft s NetMeeting It features LDAP and ILS support for address lookup and inte grates with Evolution to share the address data stored there GnomeMeet ing supports PC to phone calls allowing you to call another party with just your computer sound ca
216. l A terminal enables you to send commands to the operating system There are real physical terminals basically consisting of a display screen and a keyboard connected to the computer Then there are terminal emu lations which run in a window on your desktop and offer a prompt where you can pass commands to the operating system session Once you log in to your desktop it starts a session for you This session is valid until you log out again A session includes the start up and shut down of certain programs on login and logout These settings can be config ured individually for each user account SUSE LINUX 1901002 II 1 3 2 Configuring Desktop Components Almost all desktop components can be configured individually Right clicking the respective element opens its context menu To illustrate the procedure we provide some examples Tip Controlling the Desktop Configuration Both GNOME and KDE feature a Control Center providing central ac cess to all key configuration options of the desktop environment Refer to Chapter Bon page Vila Chapter Plon page 69 for details Tip Configuring GNOME Desktop Components Procedure 1 1 Adding a New Application to the Quick Launch Area 1 Right click an empty patch of the panel where you want to add the new application 2 Choose Add to Panel from the menu that appears 3 Select Application Launcher from the Add to Panel menu 4 Select the application fro
217. l be run ReiserFS tends to be best suited for home users but if you intend to run a high performance server you might want to use another file system Refer to File Systems in Linux in the Administration Guide for more information about the file systems supported by SUSE LINUX How can I get a short information on all software packages contained in SUSE LINUX SUSE maintains a list of all packages contained in the current version un der http www novell com products linuxpackages professional index html Either enter a package name or use one of the sort methods available Then view a short description of the package similar to the one you would get in YaST I want to remove Linux How does this work With disk delete the Linux partitions You might need to run disk in Linux Afterwards boot from the MS DOS disk and run fdisk MBRin DOS or Windows OVA XANIN ISNS System Configuration and Administration Do I need to be afraid of a virus in Linux In Linux there have been no serious viruses found Also viruses cannot cause any serious damage if they are not activated by root The only virus scanners available in Linux search e mails for Windows viruses if Linux is used as a router or server Nevertheless you should back up important data and configurations I cannot find any exe files Where are all the applications In Linux executable files normally do not have file extensions Most pro grams are located in usr bin
218. layback volume 13 1 5 The Mixer for the Sound Chip Envy24 envy24control is a mixer application for sound cards using the Envy24 ice1712 chip The flexibility of the Envy24 chip can result in varying functionalities in different sound cards The latest details on this sound chip are available in usr share doc packages alsa tools envy24control SUSE LINUX 181 182 Monitor Mixer Patchbay Router Hardware Settings Analog Volume About Digital Mixer PCM Out t PCM Out 2 PCM Out 3 PCM Out 4 PCM Out 5 PCM Out 6 Um 78 5 Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Let Right Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Stereo Gang Lal Left Right Reset Peaks Figure 13 3 Monitor and Digital Mixer of envy24control The Monitor Mixer of envy24control shows the signal levels that can be mixed digitally in the sound card The signals designated as PCM Out are generated by applications that send PCM data to the sound card The signals of the analog inputs are shown under H W In The S PDIF inputs are shown to the right Set the input and output levels of the analog channels under Analog Volume Use the Monitor Mixer sliders for digital mixing The respective levels are dis played in the Digital Mixer For each output channel the Patchbay contains a row of radio buttons for selecting the desired channel source
219. laying an index listing with or without thumbnails The icons in the toolbar provide the main functions needed The disk icon saves the selected im ages The trash icon deletes them The icon with the arrows loads the image index displayed in the right pane The icon with the paper and pencil opens the camera configuration options The door icon exits the program Your camera should be listed in the left pane Use the plus sign to the left to expand the tree display of the directory structure Your exact directory structure depends on the camera type and model Continue expanding until you reach the entries that cannot be expanded These are the index listings of the pictures Click an item to select it If View Thumbnails is activated the picture names and thumbnails are displayed in the right window pane Otherwise the names and an icon are displayed Images in the right pane can be selected or deselected by clicking them Select all images with Select gt All or Shiff A To save the selected images use the disk icon in the toolbar select File Save Selected Photos or use the shortcut Cit The Save dialog has a number of options Under What to Save select whether to save the thumbnails the images or both With Open image s with save the image and open it in another program To open the images in GIMP im mediately enter gimp Using the filenames suggested by the camera is recom mended
220. lease notes of the installed version of SUSE LINUX The packages directory holds the documentation included in the software packages windows If you have both MS Windows and Linux installed on your ystem this is where you find the MS Windows data SUSE LINUX D Learn more about the Linux file system concept and find a more comprehensive list of directories in Section 19 1 2 on page 1 4 2 Different Flavors of Your File Manager Apart from organizing all your data and previewing almost any type of file your file manager can act as a quick finder for personal data system information and network services These modules are part of your standard desktop Home Directory Use the Home desktop icon in GNOME or the icon depicting a small house in the KDE panel to launch your file manager Nautilus in GNOME Konqueror in KDE showing all the contents of your home direc tory This option allows you to quickly retrieve any personal data located in your home directory Your System If you need to know which hard drives or removable media are connected to your system click the desktop icons Computer GNOME or My Computer KDE The file managers provide an overview of all drives attached to your system including the hard drives As you click one of the drives listed there the file manager opens the files and directories located on this drive This option allows you to locate data on any kind of remov able device attached
221. letes twenty lines The most important commands in last line mode are shown in Table on the current page Table 19 3 Complex Commands of the vi Editor zq exits vi without saving any changes w filename saves as filename iX saves the modified file and exits the editor e filename edits loads filename su undoes the last edit command 19 4 The vi Editor SUSE LINUX FAQ OV XANI ISNS Additional Information Where do I find general and up to date information for SUSE LINUX In addition to this FAQ chapter SUSE provides a comprehensive FAQ Web site at http www novell com products linuxprofessional fag index html Are the SUSE manuals also available as PDF or HTML files Our manuals are included on the CDs and are also available through the SUSE help center To start the help center press F2 and enter the command susehelp The HTML versions are available in the packages suselinux adminguide en and suselinux userguide en In the installed system go to the di rectory usr share doc manual suselinux adminguide en or usr share doc manual suselinux userguide en The PDF versions can be found in suselinux adminguide en pdf and suselinux userguide en pdf Where can I get more information about SUSE LINUX Most of the information about the installation and features of SUSE LINUX is provided in the manuals Documentation for applications is avail able in usr share doc packages and the HowTos are located in
222. linea 09 el brac al 660 3 KB s 00 01 10 remaining audiocd Ogg Vorbi n me recuerda ogg e O Keep this window open after transfer is complete EA CERTES Open Destination 3 Cancel 20 Items 15 Files 646 0 MB Total 5 Fold E Figure 13 9 Ripping Audio Data with Konqueror 13 4 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity With audacity package audacity record and edit audio files This is called hard disk recording When you start the program for the first time select a lan guage At other times change the language setting under File gt Preferences gt Interface The language change is then effective the next time you start the program 13 4 1 Recording WAV Files and Importing Files Click the red recording button to create an empty stereo track and start the recording To change the standard parameters make the desired settings under File gt Preferences Audio I O and Quality are important for the recording Even if tracks already exist pressing the recording button creates new tracks Ini tially this may be confusing because these tracks cannot be seen in the standard size program window 13 4 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity File Edit View Project Generate Effect Analyze Help Biz R F Ple x JI id 9 bid Bid Bis Qm 210 Sm 210 qu c D Xm m ui ole F 30 30 Stereo 44100Hz 16 bit Mute Solo xnu ui PUN
223. ll be performed again during the next sync operation After a full backup all copies of the handheld s programs and databases are found in kde share apps kpilot DBBackup USERNAME where USERNAME is the name of the user registered on the handheld The two built in KPilot viewers can be used for a quick lookup of addresses or memos but they are not designed to actually manage this data The KDE applica tions mentioned above are much more suited for these tasks 9 5 Working with KPilot Eile Settings Help e t HotSync Address Viewer Y File Installer g Figure 9 4 The Main Window of KPilot 9 5 2 Installing Programs on the Handheld The File Installer module is an interesting and useful tool for the installation of handheld programs These programs normally have the extension prc and they are ready to start immediately after uploading them to the handheld Be fore using such add on programs read their licenses as well as the instructions included 9 5 3 Synchronizing Your Address Books and Calendars To synchronize your calendars and addresses use the KDE tools MultiSynK Start the tool with the command multisynk Create a Konnector pair before you syn chronize your data Go to File gt New and select your Konnectors Leave it with Ok The name is listed in the main window To synchronize with your handheld com puter go to File Sync SUSE LINU
224. luded in the document Open it by selecting Edit gt Navigator Figure 6 3 on the following page shows the Navigator in action The elements listed in the Navigator vary according to the document loaded in Writer 6 2 3 Formatting with Styles The dialog opened with Format gt Styles and Formatting can help you format text in a number of ways If you set the drop down list at the bottom of this di alog to Automatic OpenOffice org tries to offer a selection of styles adapted to the task at hand If you select All Styles the Stylist offers all styles from the cur rently active group Select groups with the buttons at the top SUSE LINUX ene eoyo 610 eoyjouedo SU 113 114 BO s 7 ep BB EUR H 9 ham E smi Tables EF Text frame SS Graphics 9 OLE objects 3r Bookmarks 3 Sections Hyperlinks 3 References amp Indexes Fl Notes I7 Draw objects Untitled active Y Figure 6 3 The Navigator in Writer By formatting your text with this method called soft formatting text is not format ted directly Instead a style is applied to it The style can be modified easily auto matically resulting in a formatting change of all the text to which it is assigned To assign a style to a paragraph select the style to use then click the paint bucket icon in Styles and Formatting Click the paragraphs to which to assign the style Stop assigning the style by pressing
225. lume Pcm Speaker Pcm2 PhoneOut Analog Devices AD1981B Figure 13 1 The Mixer KMix 13 1 3 alsamixer alsamixer can be run from the command line without the X environment so is entirely controlled via keyboard shortcuts An alsamixer window always con sists of the following elements a top row holding basic information on card and chip type the selected view type and the mixer item then the volume bars below the information area Use and E to scroll left or right if the controls cannot be displayed in one screen The names of the controls appear below the controls and the currently selected control is colored in red Toggle between muted and unmuted state of any mixer control using M A muted control has MM written below its name Any control that has capture recording capabilities has a red capture flag alsamixer has three different view modes Playback Capture and All By de fault alsamixer is started in playback mode displaying only those mixer con trols relevant for playback Master Volume PCM CD etc Capture displays only those controls used for recording All displays all controls available Switch the view modes using F3 F4 and F5 Select channels with and or N and P Use and Q or 3 and to in SUSE LINUX ______ 179 180 File Edit Help Playback Capture 5 A d Volume PCM Speaker ee ee ai ai ai Figure 13 2 Th
226. ly connected Gaim can send you a message announcing this play a sound or execute a com mand On first start up create a list of your accounts on different instant messaging net works by clicking Add in the Accounts window to open the appropriate dia log Select the protocol then enter your screen name password and alias Check Remember password and Auto Login if you want Gaim to log in automatically on start up To keep track of your e mail while using Gaim check New mail no tifications To select a buddy icon for your account open a file dialog and choose one Additional options such as proxy settings and server addresses can be con figured after clicking Show more options Once you have completed your ac count settings leave this dialog with Save As soon as you are done entering the account data it is shown in the login win dow To sign on select your account from the Account menu enter your pass word click Sign on and start chatting 3 4 Important Utilities Account jana GroupWise iv Password PARE a X ei Accounts Preferences Sign on p tme Figure 3 5 Gaim 3 4 4 Watching Movies with Totem Totem is a multimedia player for the GNOME desktop based on Xine It supports playback of DVDs VCDs and audio CDs Start playback of a VCD or DVD via Movie gt Play VCD or Movie gt Play DVD Totem offers
227. m The left frame provides the gallery This is a small file browser for accessing the scanned images The frame to the lower right is shared by OCR optical character recognition and the thumbnails which can be loaded into the image viewer with a simple click of the mouse See Figure 17 1 on the current page File Image Settings Help es MS ANA Y Fok 200 nx la a a Image Name Size Format ID Kooka Gallery 4 items a kscan 0001 png 317 x 441 PNG A 317 x 442 PNG y kscan 0003 png 320 x 444 PNG a kscan 0004 png 352 x 422 PNG Gallery Kooka Gallery Scanner Settings Canon N670U N676U LIDE20 e Scan mode a Color Source Resolution O 50 a Brightness O 0 2 a iie aT a m Contrast Q o E 1 d gc peo EE EZ C Use custom gamma table Edit E Final Scan Preview Scan 4 kscan 0002 0na kscan 0001 nna___kscan 0003 nna y Loading file home tux kde share apps Scanlmages kscan_0002 png 317x442 pixel 32 bit Figure 17 1 The Kooka Main Window 17 1 A preview should always be created when the object to scan is smaller than the total scanning area Set a few parameters to the left of the preview frame Select the scanning size with Custom or one of the standard formats See Figure 17 2 on this page The Custom setting is the most flexible because it allows selection of
228. m the Applications menu and quit the configura tion Procedure 1 2 Changing the Desktop Background 1 Right click the desktop 2 Choose Change Desktop Background from the menu that appears 3 A dialog window appears offering several options concerning the desktop Either use the mouse cursor to select one of the existing wallpapers or click Add to open a file dialog where you can add your own image Use Style to determine how the image should be rendered to fit into the dimensions of your display Use Remove to remove a selected background from the menu If you prefer no background image at all set a desktop color 4 Your changes are applied automatically Leave the dialog with Close 1 3 Desktop Procedure 1 3 Creating a New Desktop Icon 1 Add a new application or service icon called Launcher in GNOME a Right click the desktop to open the context menu b Select Create Launcher to open the appropriate dialog c Enter Name Generic Name an optional Comment and the Com mand to execute Determine whether the application should be run in a terminal and check whether Type is set to the appropriate value which is Application for commands d Apply your settings and leave the dialog with OK 2 Add anew folder or document a Right click the desktop to open the context menu b Select Create Folder or Create Document to ad
229. main window displays directory con tents use the items Icon Size Show Hidden Files Sort and Preview In addition use Configure Background to set the main window s background to a certain color or use an image for it The Go menu contains the navigation functions Up Back Forward and Home Page However the same functions can be accessed more quickly and conveniently through the toolbar You can also call applications from this menu and open all folders that have an icon on the desktop In the lower part of the menu find a list of the recently viewed directories or links 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Bookmarks Bookmarks can be made for Internet addresses URLs and paths to specific files or directories on your host If you select Add Bookmark the current content of the location bar is saved as a bookmark To access this location simply click this bookmark For practical reasons arrange book marks in folders The SUSE folder already exists This folder contains book marks of important SUSE Web pages Edit Bookmarks opens the book mark editor in which to perform tasks like deleting obsolete bookmarks renaming bookmarks and moving bookmarks from one folder to another Tools This menu includes entries for a variety of items such as Run Com mand Open Terminal Window and Find Files You can use View Filter to limit the view to certain
230. make the public key available to other users This enables them to use it to encrypt or sign the messages or files they send you To make the public key available for others select Keys Export Public Key s The dialog that opens offers four options 12 1 Generating a New Key Pair Generate Key Pair Name John Doe Email jdoe example com Comment optional Expiration Never e Key size 1024 E Algorithm DSA amp ElGamal y w OK lv Expert Mode 3 Cancel Figure 12 1 KGpg Creating a Key Email Your public key is sent to a recipient of your choice by e mail If you ac tivate this option and confirm with OK the dialog for creating a new e mail message with KMail appears Enter the recipient and click Send The recipient receives your key and can then send you encrypted contents Clipboard You can place your public key here before continuing to process it Default Key Server To make your public key available to a wide audience ex port it to one of the key servers on the Internet For more information refer to Section on page 170 File If you prefer to distribute your key as a file on a data medium instead of SUSE LINUX 6d2 um uodo 167 168 File Edit View Keys Groups Settings Help Y amp Y D Search Email E eet amp ElGamal subkey Sohn Doe jdoe example com Ready Figure 12 2
231. mands than listed in this chapter For information about other commands or more detailed information the O Reilly publication Linux in a Nutshell is recommended In the following overview the individual command elements are written in different typefaces 19 3 Important Linux Commands The actual command and its mandatory options are always printed as command option Specifications or parameters that are not required are placed in square brackets Adjust the settings to your needs It makes no sense to write 1s file s ifno file named file s actually exists You can usually combine several parameters for example by writing 1s la instead of 1s 1 a 19 3 1 File Commands The following section lists the most important commands for file management It covers anything from general file administration to manipulation of file system ACLs File Administration ls option s file s If you run 1s without any additional parame ters the program lists the contents of the current directory in short form 1 Detailed list a Displays hidden files cp option s source target Copies source to target i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing target is over written r Copies recursively includes subdirectories mv option s source target Copies source to target then deletes the original source b Creates a backup copy of the source before moving i Waits for confirmation if necessary before an existing
232. n and commands for GNOME and panels Select Properties to open a con figuration dialog in which to change the position and background of the panel If desired add launchers tools and various applets to the existing panels with Add to Panel Remove panel elements by right clicking their icons and selecting Remove A new panel can be added with New Panel The Applications Menu The Applications menu provides an easily accessible hierarchy of the applica tions installed on your system Most of them are grouped into smaller submenus each dedicated to a category like System Office and Internet To start any application just click Applications to unfold the complete menu Then select a suitable category unfold the submenu and click the application s name Applications not in the menu can still be started via the Run Application prompt AID F2 if you know their command For example if you want to browse your digital photographs and could not find gThumb in the menu enter gthumb at the Run Application prompt The Places Menu The Places menu provides easy access to common locations such as the user s home drives and desktop and network folders A search function for recent doc uments and a file search can also be launched with this menu For more informa tion about file management of local and remote folders refer to Section 3 2 on page 8 3 1 The Desktop
233. naging Print Jobs in GNOME Start Cups Manager from the command line with gnome cups manager or from the main menu A window opens showing any printers attached to your system Double click the icon representing the printer queue to monitor to open a window holding the list of print jobs See Figure I 4 on the next page The menu bar of the jobs window contains two menus Printer and Edit Via the Printer menu pause the printer print a test page or modify the print prop erties paper size and orientation printout mode and resolution The Jobs menu allows you to pause resume or remove any selected job that is not yet printing 1 6 2 Managing Print Jobs in KDE To control print jobs in KDE use two different applications Start and configure the print job with KPrinter then control the processing of the print job with KJob Viewer 1 6 Printing Printer Edit Name Job Number Owner Size State Test Page 86 wilber 203 0 K Printing job printing Figure 1 4 Managing Print Jobs with GNOME Cups Manager Start KPrinter with the command kprinter from the command line A small window opens in which to choose a printer and edit the Properties of your print job such as page orientation pages per sheet and duplex printing To specify the file to print the number of copies and various other options click Expand at the bottom left The window then expands and shows four tabs Files Copies
234. nalog of your MS Windows application There are three different ways to launch an application in Linux The easiest and most prominent one is the main menu of your desktop environment Click at the leftmost edge of the panel to fold out the menu Select the appropriate category to fold out a submenu holding the actual application names and icons Some applications do not appear in the main menu even though they are in stalled To launch one of them open the main menu then select Run Applica tion GNOME or Run Command KDE and enter the name of the application SUSE LINUX 17 in lowercase letters Alternatively start this dialog using Alf F2 The third way to launch an application is to open a shell and enter the command at the shell prompt also known as command line Tip Missing Applications If an application could not be started from the menu or the command line you need to install it from your SUSE LINUX CD or DVD See Section on pageD2 for details Tip 1 6 Printing Printers can either be connected to your system locally or via a network Either kind of configuration is made initially using YaST For an in depth coverage of printer configuration refer to the printer chapter in the Administration Guide As soon as a connection has been established start using the printer Both desktops provide applications enabling you to monitor and edit the print jobs queued at the selected printer 1 6 1 Ma
235. natively use QInternet SUSE LINUX 275 276 Can I copy and paste in Linux Yes this is possible Highlight the text block by clicking and dragging with the left mouse button then insert by clicking with the middle mouse button The right mouse button has a special func tion in most programs and applications How can I switch from a virtual text console to the graphical user interface By default there are six virtual text consoles that can be accessed with to F6 Press to go to the graphical user interface Why isn t there a movie player that supports encoded DVDs Movie player applications on SUSE LINUX are unable to play a number of movie file formats especially movie DVDs Due to patented codecs and copy protection SUSE is not allowed to deliver full featured movie players with the distribution Troubleshooting Where can I see the system messages System messages are logged under var 109g To access this directory and all information stored there log in as root The most important mes sages are logged in messages To view the most recent entries enter tail f var log messages in the terminal window To view messages relating to the boot process apply this command to the file boot msg To monitor the processes running on your system enter top in a termi nal window If you need to access information located under proc use procinfo xosview monitors the status of CPU usage load average memory usage and
236. nd Keep Aligned It is also possible to change the desktop background or reset it to its default setting If you need a command line environment click Open Terminal 3 1 3 The Panels On first login the GNOME desktop starts with two panels located at the top and the bottom of the screen The upper panel holds the three panel menus Applica tions Places and Desktop a quick launch area providing application buttons for the most important programs a system tray holding applet icons and a notifi cation area with the system clock and the volume control SUSE LINUX doptsed 3INON9 SUL 49 50 The bottom panel contains the window icons of all started applications in the taskbar If you click the name of a window in the taskbar it is moved to the fore ground If the program is already in the foreground a mouse click minimizes it Clicking a minimized application reopens the respective window Beside the taskbar the Workspace Switcher provides access to additional work areas These virtual desktops provide extra space in which to arrange open ap plications and windows For example put an editor on one workspace some shells on another and your e mail application and Web browser on a third Move a window to another workspace by just dragging its icon in the workspace switcher from one workspace to another If you right click an empty spot in the panel a menu opens offering help infor matio
237. ndows opened in them It also offers the following items Unclutter Windows If you have several windows on your desktop they are placed next to each other and aligned with the top left corner Cascade Windows Starting from the top left corner the windows on the desk top are placed on top of each other in such a way that only the top and left borders of the lower windows are visible Desktop x Desktop 1 is your default desktop This part of the menu lists all the windows currently opened You can bring them to the foreground by clicking one of the respective items Additional Desktops You can use the additional virtual desktops provided and switch to them with the menu or the panel All functions are available on all desktops This limits the number of programs and associated win dows that need to be arranged on one desktop These virtual desktops re semble additional desks in your office If you right click the desktop a more complex menu is displayed allowing you to customize your desktop Create New Use this menu item to create new directories files or devices on the desktop A list of possible elements is provided for selection in a sub menu 4 1 Desktop Components Bookmarks The bookmark editor allows you to create group change or delete bookmarks The bookmarks are used by the browser and file man ager Konqueror The bookmark editor can also import bookmarks from other browsers such as Mozilla
238. new files w 19 2 2 Modifying File Permissions Changing Access Permissions The access permissions of a file or directory can be changed by the owner and of course by root with the command chmod followed by the parameters changing the permissions and one or more filenames The parameters form different categories 1 users concerned IOUS eut ut 8uptoM u user owner of the file g group group that owns the file o others additional users if no parameter is given the changes apply to all categories 2 a character for deletion setting or insertion 3 the abbreviations r read w write m x execute 4 filename or filenames separated by spaces If for example the user tux in Example on the facing page also wants to grant other users write w access to the directory ProjectData he can do this using the command chmod o w ProjectData If however he wants to deny all users other than himself write per missions he can do this by entering the command chmod go w ProjectData To prohibit all users from adding a new file to the folder ProjectData enter chmod w ProjectData Now not even the owner can write to the file without first reestablishing write permissions Changing Ownership Permissions Other important commands to control the ownership and permissions of the file system components are chown change owner and chgrp change group The command chown can be used to transfer ownership
239. ng level only the playback volumes For recording turn on the Capture switch This is the master recording switch The Capture volume is the input gain for recording By default this switch is set to zero Choose a recording source like Line or Mic The recording source is exclusive so you cannot choose two of them at the same time Mix is a special recording source You can record the currently played signal from this source xnu ui PUNOS Depending on the AC97 codec chip special effects like 3D or bass treble are available too SoundBlaster Live and Audigy Family SoundBlaster Live and SB Audigy1 have numerous mixer controls for their AC97 codec chip and DSP engine In addition to the controls already described they have Wave Music and AC97 volumes to control the internal signal rout ing and attenuation for PCM WaveTable MIDI and AC97 mixing Keep the vol ume at 10076 to hear all of them SB Audigy2 depending on the model has less controls than SB Live but still has Wave and Music controls The recording on SB Live is similar to on board chip You can choose Wave and Music as the additional recording source to record the played PCM and WaveTable signals USB Audio Devices USB audio devices usually have a small number of mixer controls Sometimes they even have none at all Most devices either have a Master or PCM control switch to control the p
240. ng the tools icon configure its behavior and select a theme Control the playback with the buttons 188 133 CDs Playback and Ripping at the bottom of the player window or using the context menu opened by right clicking the panel icon or player window 13 3 3 Compressing Audio Data Audio compression can be handled by various tools The following sections fea ture a command line approach to encoding and playing audio data as well as some graphical applications capable of audio compression xnur ui PUNOS Command Line Tools for Encoding and Playback of Audio Data Ogg Vorbis package vorbis tools isa free audio compression format that is now supported by the majority of audio players The Web page of the project is http www xiph org ogg vorbis SUSE LINUX comes with several tools supporting Ogg Vorbis oggenc is a command line tool used for encoding WAV files to Ogg Just run oggenc myfile wav to transform a given wav file into Ogg Vorbis The option h displays an overview of the other parameters Oggenc supports encoding with a variable bit rate In this way an even higher degree of compression can be achieved Instead of the bit rate specify the desired quality with the parameter q b determines the average bit rate m and M specify the minimum and max imum bit rate 0gg123 is a command line Ogg player Start it with a command like ogg123 mysong ogg Compressing Audio Data Using Grip Grip is a GNOME CD pla
241. nization uses GNOME Pilot Select Tools gt Pilot Settings to open the configuration wizard Refer to the help for more information 7 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld 7 7 For More Information Evolution offers extensive internal help pages Use the Help menu to access this information For more information about Evolution refer to the project s Web site athttp www gnome org projects evolution WUDIBOld Jopue o2 puo ID JA 3 UY uounjo 3 M SUSE LINUX 127 Kontact An E Mail and Calendar Program Kontact combines the functionality of a number of KDE applications into a con venient single interface for personal information management These applications include KMail for e mail KOrganizer for the calendar KAddressbook for con tacts and KNotes for notes It is also possible to sync data with external devices such as a handheld Kontact integrates easily with the rest of the KDE desktop and connects to a variety of groupware servers It includes extra features such as spam and virus filtering and an RSS reader 8 1 Importing E Mail from Other Mail Programs 130 8 2 KontactOvervieW o 130 A Mall A eR det e RAE dar RU ia 132 84 Contacts 2 136 8 5 Calendaf ENEE 138 8 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld 140 8 7 ForMorelnformatiod 140 WUDIBOld JOpue o2 PUD j IDJA 3 UY ODC 130 Start Kontact from the main menu with
242. njoy many smart little add on features A chapter about the KDE encryption tool KGpg shows you how to secure your Internet communication Multimedia Linux offers many players both for video and audio media You can also use Linux software to create and edit your own movies or music recordings If digital image processing is your scene try GIMP which eas ily rivals Adobe Photoshop Easy to use scanning applications and album software for your digital photo collection are also provided Excursions Similar to the DOS shell a Linux system offers a powerful shell en vironment that can be used to interact directly with the operating system Learn about the basic principles behind that functionality and get some hands on experience using the most important shell commands featured in this section Appendix The SUSE LINUX FAQ contains some of the most frequently asked questions regarding SUSE LINUX Feel free to contribute and send us your suggestions If looking for in depth information about the SUSE LINUX installation process or system administration refer to the SUSE LINUX Administration Guide It intro duces installation and configuration with YaST and gives background knowledge for many services and applications running on your Linux machine Changes in the User Guide The following is a list of the changes introduced in this guide as compared to the previous version SUSE LINUX 9 2 A new chapter about basic concepts helps new u
243. not checked for incoming e mail If necessary re activate the account with Enable 7 3 2 Creating Messages To compose a new message click New gt Mail Message Replying to or for warding a message opens the same message editor Next to From select from which account to send the message In the recipient fields enter an e mail ad dress or part of a name or address in your address book If Evolution can match what you enter to something in the address book a selection list is displayed Click the desired contact or complete your input if none match To select directly from the address book click To or CC Evolution can send e mail as plain text or HTML To format HTML mail select Format in the toolbar To send attachments select Attach or Insert Attach ment To send your message click Send If not ready to send it immediately make an other selection under File For example save the message as a draft or send it later 7 3 3 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures Evolution supports e mail encryption with PGP It can sign e mail and check signed e mail messages To use these features generate and manage keys with an external application such as gpg or KGpg To sign an e mail message before sending it select Security gt PGP sign When you click Send a dialog prompts for the password of your secret key Enter the password and exit the dialo
244. nqueror In the dia log box that opens select Web Behavior gt Tabbed Browsing To open new tabs instead of windows enable Open links in new tab instead of in new window You can also hide the tab bar with Hide the tab bar when only one tab is open To see more options press Advanced Options You can save your tabs with URLs and the position of the window in a profile This is a bit different from the session managment mentioned above With pro files you have your saved tabs at hand and without intensive start up time like with session management In Konqueror go to Settings gt Configure View Profiles and give your profile a name You can save the window size in the profile too with the respective op tion Make sure that Save URLs in profile is selected Approve with Save Next time you need your tab collection go to Settings gt Load View Profile and see the name listed in the menu After selecting the name Konqueror restores your tabs 10 2 Saving Web Pages and Graphics As in other browsers you can save Web pages To do this select Location gt Save as and specify a name for your HTML file However images are not saved To archive an entire Web page including the images select Tools Archive Web Page Konqueror suggests a filename that you can usually accept The file name ends with war the extension for Web archives To vie
245. nqueror window to another by simply dragging them there while pressing the left mouse button Subsequently you are asked whether the objects should be moved or copied 4 4 Important Utilities doptiseq 3q eut The following pages introduce a number of small KDE utilities intended to as sist in daily work These applications perform various tasks such as managing your keys for encrypting and signing files and e mail messages managing your clipboard formatting floppy disks compressing and decompressing diverse file archive types and sharing your desktop with other users 4 4 1 Creating an Image Gallery If you have a large collection of images in a directory you may find it difficult to manage them Konqueror can help you by creating an HTML file with thumb nails Open the respective directory in Konqueror and select Tools gt Create Image Gallery A dialog opens in which to specify the page title the number of thumbnails per line the background and foreground colors and some other de tails When you are finished select Create to start the action By default Kon queror creates a file named images htm1 It can be opened with Konqueror and presents a well arranged thumbnail index of your image collection To view an image in full size simply click the corresponding thumbnail 4 4 2 Managing Passwords with KWallet Manager To remember all the passwords for protected resources to which you need to log in can be pro
246. ns informing you about the status of your online updates and the availability of any new updates You can also launch the check manually by clicking Check for updates Start the online update by selecting Start online update and entering the root password The YaST Online Update window is displayed SUSE Hardware Tool The SUSE Hardware Tool keeps a list of all hardware components of your system Left click the panel icon to open a dialog win dow with a tree view featuring the major hardware categories Configure a SUSE LINUX 13 new hardware item by selecting it and clicking Configure which starts the appropriate YaST module after you provide the root password Clicking Details reveals all information present for the specific hardware item As soon as new hardware is connected and recognized a pop up announces this new hardware 1 3 4 Switching Users Both GDM and KDM allow you to switch between different user accounts on the same system You can stay logged in while other users work on your system Your session is locked while you switch to another account but your applications continue to run and your whole session remains unchanged Switching Users in GNOME To open an additional session for another user select New Login from the GNOME Applications menu The other user enters username and password in GDM then another GNOME session starts Your original session is locked auto matically on the user s
247. nt desktop The desktop is your primary work environment It fills the screen but is more than just a background Put icons of your most frequently used ap plications or objects on the desktop for easy access SUSE LINUX 904002 4511 GEZEI RO 19 08 Figure 1 3 An Example Desktop panel The panel is a bar typically located at the top or the bottom of the screen that holds the menus the quick launch area a notification area or system tray some little helper applications and in most cases also the taskbar called window list in GNOME It is designed to provide all vital informa tion needed about running applications or the system and to provide easy access to some important functions or applications Both GNOME and KDE allow you to adjust the panel orientation horizontal versus vertical to your needs In a KDE environment you might also see Kicker as another word for the panel menu button Similar to the start button on the MS Windows desktop Linux desktops normally contain a menu button at the left end of the panel that opens the main menu This menu is a well ordered structure for accessing the main applications or functions such as Search Logout and Lock Session taskbar or window list The taskbar window list in GNOME is used to switch between different open windows In Linux it also provides an overview 1 3 Desktop of all virtual desktops available and provides a means to switch between
248. nt page The higher the resolution the bet ter the quality of the scanned image is However this also results in a correspond ingly larger file and the scanning process can take a very long time at high reso lutions Activate Use custom gamma table and click Edit to change the settings for brightness contrast and gamma File Image Settings Help e AAA Y Fok OOO Image Name Size Format SI Kooka Gallery 4 items P kscan 0001 png 317 x 441 PNG Preview L kescan Gop72png 317 x 442 PNG Scan Size D kscan 0003 png 320 x 444 PNG Custom m fy kscan 0004 png 352 x 422 PNG Auto Selection active on Black v RX scanner background Gallery Kooka Gallery Y Threshold RX Scanner Settings Canon N670U N676U LIDE20 Selection idth 175 Scan mode Color Source b mm E height 213 mm Resolution 4 50 E r jen epe mr z Size 140 8 kB Brightness 2 MA ES MA 03 0S CR Contrast 2 A mop d SR aS LE Use custom gamma table Edit Final Scan Preview Scan Figure 17 3 The Kooka Scanning Parameters Once all settings have been made click Final Scan to scan the image The scanned image is then displayed in the image viewer and as a thumbnail When prompted select the format in which to save the image To save all the future im ages in that same format check the corresponding box Confirm with OK 17 2 The Final Scan
249. o the internal help system This documentation is also available in HTML and PDF formats at http docs gimp org The GIMP User Group offers an informative and interesting Web site at http gug sunsite dk SUSE LINUX dINID eui ui soiudoio BUD Indu 241 Preview Printer Settings Image Output Settings Printer Name ojd DH Printer Model PostScript Level 2 Setup Printer New Printer Media Size Letter M Dimensions Width 0 00 Height 0 00 Media Type Standara y Media Source Standard y Ink Type Stanciard Resolution Standard Position Orientation Auto E Let oso Top to4 Right 8 75 Botom sss Right Border 225 Bottom Border ziz Center Vertically Both Horizontally Size Scaling FJ 72 0 3 Scale by C Percent Width 8 25 Units i Use Original PPI Height 5 29 C cm Image Size Save Print and 4 quse Settings Save Settings X Cancel Figure 18 2 The Print Dialog http www gimp org is the official home page of The GIMP Grokking the GIMP by Carey Bunks is an excellent book based on an older GIMP version Although some aspects of the program have changed it can provide excellent guidance for image manipulation An online version is available at http gimp savvy com BOOK http gimp print sourceforge net is the Web page for the GIMP print plug in The user manual available from the site prov
250. o the selected view format For example if you select PAL frames as the view format and activate Snap To the segment boundaries are always selected in multiples of frames All editing tools come with tool tips so should be easy to use The Undo History function accessed with View History is a useful feature for viewing recent editing steps and undoing them by clicking in the list Use Discard with caution because it deletes editing steps from the list Once discarded these steps can no longer be undone Cursor 10227 Hz D 9 39dB Peak 10400 Hz E9 MM 512 Fxnart Hanninn windaw Linaar framiancu Clase Figure 13 11 The Spectrum The built in spectrum analyzer assists in quickly tracking down any noises View the spectrum of the selected segment with View Plot Spectrum Select a log arithmic frequency scale in octaves with Log frequency If you move the mouse pointer within the spectrum the frequencies of the peaks are automatically dis played together with the respective notes Remove unwanted frequencies with Effect gt FFT Filter In connection with the filtering process it may be necessary to readjust the signal amplitude with Am plify Additionally use Amplify to check the amplitude By default the New 13 4 Hard Disk Recording with Audacity Peak Amplitude is set to 0 0 dB This value r
251. ode is not used very often because the writer does not perform any data corrections The best setting is Auto because it allows K3b to use the most suitable settings Simulate This function can be used to check if your system supports the se lected writing speed The writing is performed with the laser deactivated to test the system Onthe fly Burns the desired data without first creating an image file do not use this feature on low performance machines An image file also known as an ISO image is a file containing the entire CD content that is subse quently written to the CD exactly as it is Burnfree This option was formerly known as burn proof It helps to avoid buffer underruns of a CD writer If burnfree is selected the CD writer marks the current position and can return here in the event of a buffer un derrun However this causes small data gaps that are audible in audio CDs SUSE LINUX uoypolddy Buluing 3C SUI ALA C 211 212 It is preferable to select a suitable burning speed that avoids buffer under runs Only create image This option creates an image file Set the path for this file under Temporary File The image file can be written to CD at a later time To do this use Tools gt CD gt Burn CD Image If this option is used all other options in this section are deactivated Remove image Remove the temporary image file from hard disk when fin ished Ve
252. ome CD player applications as well as some applications that can be used for the ripping and encoding of audio CDs SUSE LINUX 187 Important o p CDDA and Analog CD Playback There are two different ways of playing back audio CDs CD and DVD drives capable of analog CD playback read out the audio data and send it to the sound output device Some external drives connected via PCMCIA FireWire or USB need to use CDDA Compact Disk Digital Audio to extract the audio data first then play it as digital PCM The players featured in the following sections do not support CDDA Use XMMS if you need CDDA support Important E 13 3 1 KsCD Audio CD Player KsCD is an easy to use audio CD player It integrates into the KDE taskbar and can be configured to start playing automatically after a CD has been inserted To access the configuration menu select Extras gt Configure KsCD Fetch album and track information from a CDDB server on the Internet if KsCD is configured accordingly You can also upload CDDB information to share it with others Use the CDDB dialog for information retrieval and upload O Pause mm 7 Playing 01 04 08 O MN Vol 77 01 15 Stop A Eject lila downs border la linea Q Previous 9 Next mi coraz n me recuerda Random Loop E CDDB o Extras v Figure 13 6 The KsCD User Interface 13 3 2 GNOME CD Player Applet This is a simple applet that integrates into a GNOME panel Usi
253. on is by using the configuration assistant Select Settings gt Configuration Assistant to start the assistant In the first SUSE LINUX LO UM JOLNAWOD pjeupuoH D BulzluoJyou s 143 144 step enter your username and the name of the device to which the handheld is connected The assistant attempts to detect them itself if you select Autodetect Handheld amp Username If the autodetection fails refer to Section 2 2 on this page After confirming with Next the assistant prompts you to specify the applica tions that should be used for synchronization You can choose among the KDE application suite default Evolution and none After selecting close the window with Finish 9 2 2 Creating a dev pilot Link The setup of the connection with a serial handheld cradle is different from that of a USB cradle Depending on which cradle is used you may or may not need to create a symbolic link named dev pilot USB Normally a USB cradle is autodetected and there should be no need to cre ate the symbolic link mentioned Serial With a serial cradle you need to know to which serial port itis actually connected Serial devices are named dev ttyS starting from dev ttySO for the first port To set up a cradle connected to the first serial port enter the command ln s dev ttyS0 dev pilot 9 3 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit Initially it should be sufficient to enable the KAddressBook cond
254. ong with the filename 19 3 Important Linux Commands i Ignores case H Only displays the names of the respective files but not the text lines n Additionally displays the numbers of the lines in which it found a hit 1 Only lists the files in which searchstring does not occur diff option s filel file2 Thediff command compares the contents of any two files The output produced by the program lists all lines that do not match This is frequently used by programmers who need only send their program alterations and not the entire source code q Only reports whether the two files differ u Produces a unified diff which makes the output more readable File Systems mount option s device mountpoint This command can be used to mount any data media such as hard disks CD ROM drives and other drives to a directory of the Linux file system r mount read only t filesystem Specifies the file system commonly ext2 for Linux hard disks msdos for MS DOS media v at for the Windows file system and iso9660 for CDs For hard disks not defined in the file etc fstab the device type must also be specified In this case only root can mount it If the file system should also be mounted by other users enter the option user in the ap propriate line in the etc fstab file separated by commas and save this change Further information is available in mount 1 umount option s mountpoint This command unmounts a mounted drive from
255. ooka pack age adds some basic text recognition features Find more information about Kooka at http www kde org apps kooka or refer to Chapter 17 on page p 4 Gwenview Gwenview is a simple image viewer for KDE It features a folder tree window and a file list window that provides easy navigation of your file hierarchy Find more information at http gwenview sourceforge net home 2 5 System and File Management The following section provides an overview of Linux tools for system and file management Get to know text and source code editors backup solutions and archiving tools 2 5 System and File Management Table 2 5 System and File Management Software for Windows and Linux Task Windows Application Linux Application Text Editor NotePad WordPad kate gedit X Emacs vim X Emacs PDF Creator Acrobat Distiller Scribus PDF Viewer AcrobatReader AcrobatReader xpdf kpdf Text Recogni Recognita FineReader GOCR tion Command Line zip rar arj lha etc zip tar gzip bzip2 etc Pack Programs Hard Disk PowerQuest Acronis YaST GNU Parted Partitioner Partition Commander Backup Soft ntbackup Veritas dar taper dump ware kate Kate is part of the KDE suite It has the ability to open several files at once either locally or remotely With syntax highlighting project file creation and external scripts execution it is a perfect tool for a programmer Find more information at http kate kde org gedit GEdit is t
256. or all your transfers set KGet back to the on line mode by deactivating Options gt Offline Mode The transfers should start at the specified times Settings In Settings gt Configure KGet set preferences for the connection determine directories for specific file extensions and specify other settings 4 44 The Clipboard Klipper The KDE program Klipper serves as a clipboard for selected text normally marked by keeping the left mouse button pressed This text can be transferred to another application by moving the mouse pointer to the target location then pressing the middle mouse button on a two button mouse press both buttons simultaneously The text is copied to the selected location from the clipboard By default Klipper is started when KDE is loaded and appears as a clipboard icon in the panel View the contents of the clipboard by clicking this icon The Klipper context menu and the last seven entries also referred to as the history are displayed See Figure 4 3Jon this page If an extensive text was copied to Klipper only the first line of the text is displayed The most recent entry is listed on top and is marked as active with a black check mark To copy an older text fragment from Klipper to an application select it by clicking it move the mouse pointer to the target application then middle click LJ Klipper Clipboard Tool Jusr share doc release notes RELEASE NOTES de html Jusr share do
257. or clicking the paint bucket icon again Easily create your own styles by formatting a paragraph or a character as desired using the Format menu or toolbar Select the formatted item from which to copy the style Then click and hold the button to the right of the bucket in Styles and Formatting and select New Style from Selection from the menu that opens En ter a name for your style and click OK This style can then be applied to other texts Change details of a style by selecting it in the list right clicking and selecting Modify from the menu This opens a dialog in which all the possible formatting properties are available for modification 6 2 Word Processing with Writer 6 3 Introducing Calc Calc is OpenOffice org s spreadsheet application Create a new spreadsheet with File gt New gt Spreadsheet or open one with File Open Calc can read and save in Microsoft Excel s format In the spreadsheet cells enter fixed data or formulas A formula can manipulate data from other cells to generate a value for the cell in which it is inserted You can also create charts from cell values 6 4 Introducing Impress Impress is designed for creating presentations for screen display or printing such as on transparencies Create a presentation from scratch with File New gt Presentation To create one with the assistance of a wizard use File Wiz ards gt P
258. ore fonts for installation 4 The marked fonts are then installed to your personal font folder Selecting a font shows a preview To update system fonts first select Administrator mode and enter your root password Then proceed as described for user font installation SUSE LINUX doptseq 3d eut 97 Help and Documentation SUSE LINUX comes with various sources of information and documentation The SUSE Help Center provides central access to the most important documentation resources on your system in searchable form These resources include online help for the installed applications manual pages info pages databases on hardware and software topics and all manuals delivered with your product 5 1 Using the SUSE Help Center 100 o2 Matnlases s oko oot eek koe x odo eg 102 D Info Pages cours o kh Ran 103 54 The Linux Documentation Project 104 5 5 Wikipedia the Free Online Encyclopedia 105 5 6 Guides and BOOKS 105 bil Usenet o csi ra a EE 106 UOHDJUSUnIog pup d eH 100 5 1 Using the SUSE Help Center When you start the SUSE Help Center for the first time from the main menu SuSE help center or with the command susehelp in the shell the view as shown in Figure 1jon the facing page is displayed The dialog window consists of three main areas Menu Bar and Toolbar The menu bar provides the main editing navigation and conf
259. ors amp Fonts to adjust the appearance of the chat win dows for communication with other participants Choose from the classic themes SUSE LINUX 91 of the corresponding providers or create a custom theme by adjusting the font or color to personal preference Adding Contacts Add contacts to chat with them If you have already created an account on an other PC this data is imported and automatically added to your contact list To create a contact entry manually click File Add contact A new assistant ap pears to help with creation However you must be online to add a contact to your list Adding Groups Access this with File gt Create New Group Name the group and confirm this with OK A new folder appears in the contact list that can be used to store the desired contacts Drag and drop contacts into the desired folder Grouping con tacts can give a better overview File Edit Settings Help amp G9 t9 HelpDesk1 t HelpDesk2 t9 HelpDesk3 t HelpDesk4 t9 HelpDesk5 t9 Helpdesk GroupWise y Helpdesk Linux Helpdesk Oracle Y Helpdesk Phoenix Cy t9 Helpdesk Telecomm E El E E Figure 4 7 The Main Kopete Window Using Kopete Itis necessary to establish a connection to the Internet to be able to chat with other participants When this is done clicking File gt Connection gt Connect 4 4 Important Utilities All then establishe
260. ounts o o e 120 7 3 2 Creating Messages o e ee eee 121 SUSE LINUX xi Xii 7 3 3 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures 73 4 Folders e 4 4 e008 EE a IRURE RR ea ee RR Os 735 Iter ausis S x Be eee e Ede LAS Contacts 4 A koe os al A E RACE EUROS E koe eM RU RECS 741 Adding Contacts llle 42 Makinga list m irent etenim od ee x sena m Z5 Calendars swa Red ses ecd Rn da e Mae ak ie 751 AddingAppointments llle 75 2 SchedulingaMeeting o o 753 Adding Calendars ooo oo 76 Syncing Data with a Handheld 7 ForMorelnformation e pid beaded 8 2 Kontact Overview naasa 8 2 1 Mail em emGy OE x uo edo E xus B 222 Contacts ie os cuore a mc qox mae Bers 823 To Do List llle B24 Calendar vn og a Ro deem Re AE EE dE ai 8 23 NOES e oo Eo e oo RUE UR or PISA E RR IDEE BS Mails crasas rd ra e Rae E mI ES 83 1 Configuring Accounts 8 3 2 CreatingMessages ee ee 8 3 3 Encrypted E Mail and Signatures 834 Folders AAA e RN eik aa at a a a 8 4 Contacts s so s ss oo o m ERG eo Rm m y 9 b m b EES 841 Adding Contacts llle 842 Making a List gt cec stesa eee Contents 8 4 3 Adding Address Books 138 B5 Calendar ee cm o o Ry EUR ee ecc een 138 85 1 Scheduling an Event llle 139 8 5 2 Adding Calendars ooo
261. ow appears like that in Figure 4 10 on this page You can see the phrase and the assigned shortcut By right clicking the phrase book or a phrase itself open pop up menu in which to select New Phrase Insert your phrase in the text field You can assign a shortcut with the keycap button When satisfied with your settings choose File gt Save Your added phrase book is shown in your toolbar File Edit Help B C Scd Phrase Shortcut Hcourteousness J thanks J thank you J thank you very much H please J here you are Manu b r Currently Selected Phrase or Phrase Book Name of the phrase book Greetings Figure 4 10 Using Phrase Books in KMouth 4 4 10 Font Administration with KFontinst By default SUSE LINUX provides various fonts commonly available in different file formats Bitmap TrueType etc These are known as system fonts Users can additionally install their own fonts from various collections on CD ROM Such user installed fonts are however only visible and available to the corresponding user The KDE control center provides a comfortable tool for administering system and user fonts It is shown in Figure on the next page 4 4 Important Utilities Y Font Installer The fonts shown are your personal fonts To see and install system wide fonts click on the Administrator Mode button below Qe ki af 3 Adobe Courier Betsy Fland Arnprior 3 Ado
262. p resume delete queue and add transfers Adding Transfers Start KGet by pressing Alf F2 and entering the command kget When the pro gram starts for the first time a dialog is displayed Confirm this dialog to inte grate KGet in Konqueror When you close the dialog KGet is integrated in the system tray of the panel as an icon with a downward arrow Click this arrow to open the dialog displaying your transfers To add a transfer to the list select File gt Paste A dialog opens Enter a URL in the input field and confirm with OK Then specify the location for saving the downloaded file After all information has been entered the entry for the transfer is added to the main window of KGet and started Another way to add a transfer is by means of drag and drop Simply drag a file for example from an FTP server from Konqueror and drop it in the main win dow Timer Controlled Transfers You can also instruct KGet to perform your transfers at a specific time Activate Options Offline Mode All transfers inserted from this point are not started immediately but queued To start the clock double click the respective entry A dialog opens Select Advanced The dialog is expanded by the settings needed for starting the transfer at a certain time Enter the day month year time and ac tivate the Timer icon Then close the window 4 4 Important Utilities After making the desired settings f
263. passwords and local passwords in separate wallet files Close with Fin ish Once configured KWallet appears in the panel Right click the KWallet icon and select Configure Wallet if you want to modify the configured A dialog window opens Configure different settings like how KWallet closes a wallet which wal let is automatically selected and two options about the wallet manager itself The KWallet Manager Window To store data in your wallet or view its contents open the manager window by right clicking the KWallet icon in the panel and selecting Configure Wallet The kdewallet folder is the default folder for your passwords Click kdewallet and a window prompts for your password After a successful login you can see the main window It is divided into four different parts the top left part displays a summary the top right part displays subfolders the lower left part shows a list with folder entries and the lower right part shows the contents of a selected en try The window is shown in Figure 4 2 on the next page 4 4 Important Utilities File Settings Help Folder Form Data 7 Form Data Passwords D N Contains 2 items UO m Name Value Map test U Folder Entry X Show values O Bi Dat Co E gd et D Key Value N a X foo O Passwords O foobar Unknown a Figure 4 2 The KWallet Manager Window To insert a new
264. pecial filter menu in which to activate contextual filter functions Of particular interest is the Navigate menu This is built directly from the EPG data It appears in the language provided by the network 14 5 Watching Digital Video Broadcasts with xawtv4 As your hardware has been properly configured with YaST start xawtv4 from the main menu Multimedia gt Video xawtv4 Before you can actually start watching your favorite broadcasts build a database of DVB stations Ele Edit Stations Devices Settings Commands sep File station no filter a pie oe BBC World Date Begin End Station Fri 14 01 09 05 14 00 Das Erste Fri 14 01 11 30 12 00 rbb Berlin Fri 14 01 14 00 14 10 Das Erste u tegory scap melodrama folkloric Category show game show general laudio Stereo Ready ae sut Fv station Properties nx Souls Group Key Ch TSID PNR General Neme bes ESD ffentliche F6 SE4 257 2 UD ffentliche E mem me ma e JS rbb Brandenburg dritte 258 11 EA S dwest BW RP dritte 772 16 Analog TV zi Zeie mm we ProSieben private SE20 769 16403 to Eu es ines RTL private Eli 773 16405 Digital TV DVB TSID PNR 258 14 Das Erste P um a ena ESTO news 772 16387 Pok d sen _ cancel E i aot od ene d ME Spo TSID 258
265. plications Furthermore the SUSE Help Center provides access to SUSE s online databases that cover special hardware and software issues for SUSE LINUX All these sources can be searched comfortably once a search index has been gener ated 5 1 Using the SUSE Help Center File Edit View Go Settings Help Oo RIAA B SUSE HelpCenter Contents Search Glossary mmm JRelease Notes SUSE LINUX Adminguide Germ SUSE LINUX Administration Guic T SUSE LINUX Adminguide Spani T SUSE LINUX Adminguide Frenc SUSE LINUX Adminguide Italiar Release Notes SUSE LINUX Userguide Germar A short description of the most important changes x ISUSELINUXUSerGUMS cx for this SUSE Linux release ISUSE LINUX Userguide Spanist aus LINUX Userguide French SUSE LINUX Adminguide German SISUSE LINUX Userguide Italian SUSE LINUX Administrationguide German F Application Manuals o Willkommen Fl Administration Sra DEDERE F Development Fl Online Resources Installation o System o Dienste o DI In EID Administration Figure 5 1 The Main Window of the SUSE Help Center 5 1 2 The Search Function To search all installed information sources of SUSE LINUX generate a search in dex and set a number of search parameters To do this open the Search tab See Figure 5 2 on the following page If no search index has been generated the system automatically prompts you to do
266. port 65 3 5 1 GNOME On Screen Keyboard 65 352 Gnopemicus ee ee 66 9 5 9 O 3 56e m dem Qe RECRUIT RE 67 4 The KDE Desktop 69 41 Desktop Componenta llle 70 LP 70 Ltn aed eae de qn al de f eue ut dr en 72 A2 jSet ngs zs ase keene eke be HRs teats eos Exi 73 Lu bia AE oe a didt s 73 422 Appearance amp Theme 73 2 9 DESKTOP xi Auberge amp tile ith en citer eem deet ecd wand 74 42 4 Internet amp Network 75 425 KDEComponent 75 42 6 Peripherals x uoo eme GR demo i 76 SUSE LINUX 42 7 PowerControd eee 76 42 8 Regional amp Accessibility o o 76 429 Security amp Privacy o ooo o 77 A d eod abu A 77 ieee d dedo dre eU d 77 43 Konqueror as a File Manager 78 43 1 FilePreview ne 78 4 3 2 FileAssociations lens 79 433 TheKonquerorMenu 80 434 The Toolbar ke RR e RUE e 82 435 TheLocationBar o 82 43 6 TheMain Window o 82 44 Important Utilities o oo ee ee 83 DAR LUE 83 83 4 4 3 The Download Manager KGet 86 TEC ee ETEN ee cc 87 88 4 4 6 Screenshots with KSnapshot 0 89 4 4 7 Viewing PDF Files with KPDF 90 4 4 8 Chatting With Friends Kopete 91 449 KDE Accessibility Tools 93 4 4 10 Font Administration with KFontinst
267. pplication moto 14 1 1 Video Source and Network Search In Settings Input select the video source If you select Television here set up the broadcasting network before starting the application This automatically takes place with the network search also found under the Settings menu If you click Save settings the network found is entered into the xawtv file in your home directory and will be available the next time you start the application 198 14 Watching TV with motv Selecting Channels If you do not want to browse for all available channels find the next channel with CD D If needed subsequently adjust the broadcast frequency with or 2 Tip 14 1 2 Retrieving Audio Data The audio output of the TV card is connected to the line input of your sound card to the speakers or to an amplifier Some TV cards can change the volume of the audio output The volume can then be set with the sliders that appear after selecting Settings gt Slider This window also provides the sliders for bright ness contrast and color To use your sound card for audio playback check the mixer settings using gamix described in Section 13 1 on page 178 For sound cards meeting the AC97 spec ifications set Input MUX to Line The volume can then be adjusted with the Master and Line sliders 14 1 3 Screen Proportions and Full Screen Mode Most television images
268. ption of it us ing http www suse de feedback and read the article at http portal suse com sdb en 2001 10 bugreport html What is a mirror Why shouldn t I get these things from ftp suse com As there are many users who need to retrieve things from the server at the same time its capacity limit would be reached very quickly For this reason there are a number of other FTP servers that contain a duplicate of the SUSE server These servers are referred to as mirrors Select a mirror in your vicinity same country to speed up the download A list of mirrors is avail able at http www novell com products linuxprofessional downloads ftp int mirrors html I might have a problem or question that isn t referenced here Is there a way to submit this information so others can benefit from it Submit your questions by contacting the writers of this book via an e mail to mailto documentation suse de subject FAQ Future editions of this FAQ will benefit from your feedback Note that the editors will not provide support of any kind in answer to your mail Refer to the support team if in need of help Index A dc access permissions Kaffeine accessibility kdetv GNOME endisse erro kin red KMix A un nen isi SKSCD iva enn nsn 188 AIEVE ON LilyPond inermes ASA uri acen anaE S Main Actors use ENEE NIESEN amaroK erte ENEE dene ere E ee HEN dius ere e a etur meena applications cernere ente Notee
269. ptions gt Preferences gt Audio I O Plugins If the xmms kde package is installed the aRts sound server can be con figured here Important 8 D Using the Disk Writer Plug In XMMS automatically redirects its output to the Disk Writer Plugin if it is not able to find a configured sound card In this case the played files are written to the hard disk as WAV files The time display then runs faster than when playing the output through a sound card Important _ Start various visualization plug ins with Options Preferences gt Visualiza tion Plugins If you have a graphics card with 3D acceleration select an appli cation such as the OpenGL spectrum analyzer If the xmms plugins package is installed try the Infinity plug in 13 2 Multimedia Players db 60 170 310 600 IK 3K 6K 12K 14k I6K xnur ui PUNOS X MULTIMEDIA SY STEM 8 CD Audio Track 08 LEE EE FILE FILE at OPT Figure 13 5 XMMS with Equalizer OpenGL Spectrum Analyzer and Infinity Plug Ins To the left under the menu button there are five buttons with different letters on them These buttons allow quick access to additional menus dialog and configu rations Open the playlist with PL and the equalizer with EQ 13 3 CDs Playback and Ripping There are many ways to listen to your favorite music tracks Either play a CD or play digitalized versions of them The following section features s
270. r Klipper should be started automatically the next time you log in If you click No start the program from the main menu the next time you want to use it If you click Cancel the program is not terminated 4 4 5 Ark Displaying Decompressing and Creating Archives To save space on the hard disk use a packer that compresses files and directo ries to a fraction of their original size The application Ark can be used to man age such archives It supports common formats such as zip tar gz tar bz2 lha and rar Start Ark from the main menu or from the command line with ark If you al ready have some compressed files move these from an open Konqueror window to the Ark window to view the contents of the archive To view an integrated pre view of the archive in Konqueror right click the archive in Konqueror and select Preview in Archiver Alternatively select File gt Open in Ark to open the file directly See Figure 4 4 on the next page Once you have opened an archive perform various actions Action offers op tions such as Add File Add Folder Delete Extract View Edit With and Open With 4 4 Important Utilities File Edit Action Settings Help 3 px be 9400 E gt Search Qo Filename Permissions Owner Group Size Timestamp Link X t html rW r r tux users 148 2005 02 24 10 36 UO rW r r tux users 2 2005 02 24 10 3
271. r gPhoto2 SUSE LINUX _______ 225 Kooka A Scanning Application Kooka is a KDE application for scanning This chapter explains the user interface and the functionality of the application In addition to creating image files from printed media like photographs or magazines Kooka has character recognition capabilities This means it can help convert written text to a text file that can be edited Se ie etre ye ee ee ee ed 229 T Gach Apes eden Soe Sages ae ed aes che 229 IZ3 The Ments lt 42004 24a ee ns a eee A a Paced a 231 174 The Gallery ioe in tet oeste a ee ee BA a 231 17 5 Optical Character Recognition 232 uoubooigddy Buluuoos v D 00X 228 Start Kooka from the main menu or enter the command kooka When started Kooka opens a three frame window with a menu bar to the upper left and a tool bar directly below it All windows can be freely readjusted or rearranged with the mouse It is also possible to completely detach single frames from the Kooka window for deliberate placement on the desktop To move the frames click and drag the thin double line right above the frame Any frame except the main win dow can be placed within any other frame aligned to the left right top bottom or center Centered windows have the same size are stacked and can be brought to the foreground with tabs The Image Viewer and the Scan Preview frames share a window by default Tabs allow switching between the
272. rd ing the installation or hardware configuration procedures under SUSE LINUX These procedures are covered in depth in the Administration Guide and some of the most frequently encountered problems are dealt with in the SUSE LINUX FAQ at the end of this book 1 1 Logging In and Out If your computer is not run in a networking environment and you are the only person using it your system automatically boots into the desktop environment Once you have started your computer there is no need for you to authenticate This feature called auto login is only provided by the KDM display manager however It can be disabled at any time using the YaST user management mod ule described in the Administration Guide If more than one user account is configured on your computer any user must authenticate After your SUSE LINUX system has started you are prompted for your username and password Depending on the desktop environment installed the program managing the lo gin process and sessions is either GDM for GNOME desktops or KDM for KDE GDM and KDM differ slightly in functionality which is why they are treated sep arately See Section 1 3 on page 7 for details on the desktop environments or refer to the separate GNOME or KDE chapters Chapter B on page 27 or Chapter Hon page 69 1 1 1 Introducing GDM A GDM login screen consists of two main components the input field for user name and password and a menu See Figure 1 1 on the facing page
273. rd and microphone without any additional hardware Find more information about GnomeMeeting at http www gnomemeeting org KPhone KPhone is a program to initiate Voice over IP connections across the Internet Find more information at http www wirlab net kphone gftp gftp is an FTP client using the Gtk toolkit Its features include simultaneous downloads resume of interrupted file transfers file transfer queues down load of entire directories FTP proxy support remote directory caching pas sive and nonpassive file transfers and drag and drop support Find more information at http gftp seul org kbear KBear is a KDE FIP client with the ability to have concurrent connec tions to multiple hosts three separate view modes support for multi ple protocols like ftp sftp etc a site manager plug in firewall support logging capabilities and much more Find more information at http kbear sourceforge net 2 3 Multimedia The following section introduces the most popular multimedia applications for Linux Get to know media players sound editing solutions and video editing tools SUSE LINUX SIOMIJOS SU OUM OL Buieo 37 Table 2 3 Multimedia Software for Windows and Linux Task Windows Application Linux Application Audio CD CD Player Winamp Win KsCD Grip Player dows Media Player CD Burner Nero Roxio Easy CD Cre K3b ator CD Ripper WMPlayer Grip kaudiocreator Audio Player Winamp Windows Media amaro
274. reen To change this select an item from Cap ture Mode To save the screenshot to a file select Save as and set the directory SUSE LINUX _______ 89 90 ES New Snapshot CH Save As Print Capture mode Snapshot delay No delay gt Help lo Quit Figure 4 5 KSnapshot and filename in the dialog that opens To print the screenshot right away select Print 4 4 7 Viewing PDF Files with KPDF PDF is probably one of more important formats KPDF is a KDE program that can view and print them Start KPDF by pressing and entering the command kpdf Load a PDF file with File gt Open KPDF displays it in its main window On the left side there is a sidebar with thumbnails and a contents view Thumbnails give an overview of the page The contents view contains bookmarks to navigate in your docu ment Sometimes it is empty meaning bookmarks are not supported by this PDF To view two pages in the main window select View Two Pages The view depends on what last two options you activate in the View menu Another nice option is to select the area in which you are interested with the se lect tool from the toolbar Draw a rectangle and choose from the pop up menu whether you need the selected area as text or as a graphic It is copied to the clip board You can even save the area to a file 4 4 Important Utilities 4 4 8 Chatting With Friends
275. resentation Open an existing presentation with File Open Im press can open and save Microsoft PowerPoint presentations 6 5 Introducing Base OpenOffice 2 0 introduces a new database module Create a database with File gt New gt Database A wizard opens to assist in creating the database Base can also work with Microsoft Access databases Tables forms queries and reports can be created manually or using convenient wizards For example the table wizard contains a number of common fields for business and personal use Databases created in Base can be used as data sources such as when creating form letters 6 6 For More Information OpenOffice org includes a number of information options that provide different levels of information To get thoroughly acquainted with a topic select Help gt OpenOffice org Help The help system provides in depth information about each of the modules of OpenOffice org Writer Calc Impress etc SUSE LINUX ene SOO 810 eoyouedo eu 115 116 File Edit View Insert Tools Window Help BPpakthhvai wh Oo d EE E f E Create Table in Design View Description KK Use Wizard to Create Table Choose from a selection of business and personal table Tables EI Create View samples which you customize to create a table Queries None Forms Reports Embedded database HSQL database engine Figure 6 4 Base Databas
276. ress in the respective fields Enter the optional information if desired Check Make this my default ac count to use this account by default when writing mails Click Forward Select the appropriate incoming e mail format for this address in Server Type POP is the most common format for downloading mail from a remote server IMAP works with mail folders on a special server Obtain this information from your ISP or server administrator Complete the other relevant fields displayed when the server type is selected Click Forward when finished Select the de sired Receiving Options if available Click Forward The next set of information to enter is about mail delivery To submit outgoing e mail to the local system select Sendmail For a remote server select SMTP Get the details from your ISP or server administrator For SMTP complete the other fields displayed after selection Click Forward when finished 7 3 Mail By default the e mail address is used as the name to identify the account Enter another name if desired Click Forward Click Apply to save your account con figuration To make an account the default account for sending e mail select the desired ac count then press Default To disable fetching e mail from an account select the account then click Disable A disabled account can still be used as the address for sending but that account is
277. rify written data Check the integrity of the written data by comparing the MD5 sums of the original and the burned data The Settings tab features options needed for the creation of CDs with multiple data or audio tracks multisession CDs In the Volume Desc tab enter some general information that can be used to identify this particular data project its publisher and preparer and the application and operating system used in the cre ation of this project Under File system specify settings for the file system on the CD RockRidge Joliet UDF Also determine how symbolic links file per missions and blanks are treated In the Advanced tab experienced users can specify additional settings After adjusting all settings to your needs start the actual burning process us ing Burn Alternatively save these settings for future use and adjustment with Save 15 2 Creating an Audio CD Basically there are no significant differences between creating an audio CD and creating a data CD Select File 2 New Audio Project Drag and drop the indi vidual audio tracks to the project folder The audio data must be in WAV or Ogg Vorbis format Determine the sequence of the tracks by moving them up or down in the project folder The dialog for burning an audio CD is not very different from the dialog for burning a data CD However the Disc at once and the Track at once modes have greater importance The
278. ronic folders in which files programs and subdirectories are stored The top 19 1 Introduction to Bash level directory in the hierarchy is the root directory referred to as This is the place from which all other directories can be accessed The home directory contains the directories in which the individual users can store their personal files Figure 19 1 on this page shows the standard directory tree in Linux with the home directories of the example users xyz linux and tux The directory tree of a Linux system has a functional structure that follows the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard The following list provides a brief description of the standard directories in Linux Eis boo SES E E AAA E oda da 397 kiss yx3 linux tux X1 IR6 bin ec ib 1ocat sbin share Do bin lib man bin lib man Figure 19 1 Excerpt from a Standard Directory Tree root directory starting point of the directory tree home private directories of users dev device files that represent hardware components etc important files for system configuration etc init d boot scripts usr bin generally accessible programs SUSE LINUX IOUS eut ut BUMOM 247 bin programs needed early in the boot process usr sbin programs reserved for the system administrator sbin programs reserved for the system administrator and needed for booting usr include header files for the C compiler usr include g header f
279. ross platform NET applications The project implements various technologies that have been submitted to the ECMA for standardization For more information refer to http www mono project com about index html 2 6 Software Development The GNOME Desktop This chapter introduces the GNOME GNU Network Object Model Environment desktop It provides a brief overview of the most important elements and func tionalities of your desktop including an in depth description of the file manager Nautilus Finally get to know several smart and useful applications that can help you feel at home in your new desktop environment 8 1 TheDesktop o sori a opa RR RR RR RR 48 Dc 52 3 3 File Management with Nautilus 57 34 Important Utilities lt 61 3 5 Assistive Technology Support 65 dopiseq INONI SUL 48 GNOME has a very intuitive look and feel to it However users migrating to Linux from a Microsoft Windows desktop might need to get accustomed to a few things Users migrating from a Macintosh might notice that GNOME feels very much like home because it aims to provide a Mac type look and feel to a Linux desktop Two issues are very important double click Like a Mac desktop a GNOME desktop is entirely ruled by the double click To trigger an event by clicking a desktop icon for example open your home folder you need to double click it To open subdirectories in the file manager
280. rs You can change the color of the window background your menu links and others Fonts are also an essential part of your desktop Set your default fonts with Fonts This module displays a preview of the currently selected font in a text field With Choose select the font style and size SUSE LINUX 73 74 Icons controls the icon style for the whole desktop You can select the KDE Clas sic style the Crystal SVG style or others With Advanced fine tune the icons appearance Launch Feedback runs a visual feedback for your mouse cursor If an applica tion is started KDE shows for example a busy cursor Choose the style like blinking or bouncing You can also try a passive cursor or disable this effect en tirely If you do not use your computer for a specific time a screen saver automatically appears With the Screen Savers module configure all the necessary settings Se lect from a lot of types like banners fractals and illusions To tweak the settings for a specific screen saver click Setup More options can be found in Advanced Options When KDE starts it shows a small image This image can be defined with Splash Screen Click Test to display the splash screen With Style modify the visual appearance of user interface elements GUI Choose a style to preview it in the example below Effects and Miscellanous can enable some GUI effects an
281. s a connection between Kopete and the selected messaging service The main application windows features a list of contacts When you right click a contact marked as online a menu opens with various options Send that person a message or start a chatting session A chat allows invitation of additional partic ipants for real time discussion Connection to all participants is closed when the creator of the chat session closes it Transfer files by right clicking a username Many options such as Delete Con tact Show User Information Block User and Send File can be found in the menu that opens Clicking Send File opens a dialog for selecting the desired file Confirming with OK sends a dialog to the recipient asking whether he wants to accept the file If he accepts the file transfer starts 4 4 9 KDE Accessibility Tools KDE offers handicap support for daily computer work There are a number of options in KDE especially Regional amp Accessibility gt Accessibility in the KDE Control Center Some additional programs also help meet particular needs KMag Magnify Your Desktop People with low vision have limited possibilities for improve the visibility of their desktop The font size can be increased but that is not always a good so lution The tool KMag solves this problem It is a tool to magnify your desktop Start it with the command kmag then see a part of the screen in the KMag win
282. s temporary storage for e mail that has not yet been sent It is useful if working offline or if the outgoing mail server is temporarily unreach able Drafts is used for saving unfinished e mail messages The Trash folder is intended for temporary storage of deleted items Junk is for Evolution s junk sorting feature New folders can be created under On This Computer or as subfolders of ex isting folders Create as complex a folder hierarchy as desired To create a new folder select File New gt Mail Folder In the following dialog enter a name for the new folder Use the mouse to determine the parent folder under which to place the new folder Exit the dialog with OK To move a message into a folder select the message to move Right click to open the context menu Select Move to Folder and in the dialog that opens the des tination folder Click OK to move the message The message header in the orig inal folder is shown with a line through it meaning it is marked for deletion in that folder The message is stored in the new folder Messages can be copied in a similar manner Manually moving a number of messages into different folders can be time consuming Filters can be used to automate this procedure 7 3 Mail 7 3 5 Filters Evolution offers a number of options for filtering e mail Filters can be used to move a message into a specific folder or to delete a message Messages can also
283. save the image in the chosen format press Save To abort press Cancel If the image has features that cannot be saved in the chosen format a dialog ap pears with choices for resolving the situation Choosing Export if offered nor mally gives the desired results A window then opens with the options of the for mat Reasonable default values are provided 18 5 Printing Images To print an image select File gt Print from the image menu If your printer is configured in SUSE it should appear in the list In some cases it may be nec essary to select an appropriate driver with Setup Printer Select the appropri ate paper size with Media Size and the type in Media Type Other settings are available in the Image Output Settings tab In the bottom portion of the window adjust the image size Press Use Original Image Size to take these settings from the image itself This is recommended if you set an appropriate print size and resolution in the image Adjust the image s position on the page with the fields in Position or by dragging the image in Pre view When satisfied with the settings press Print To save the settings for future use instead use Print and Save Settings Cancel aborts printing 18 6 For More Information The following are some resources that may be useful for a GIMP user Unfortu nately many resources apply to older versions Help provides access t
284. sers See ChapterlIJon pageB f you are new to SUSE LINUX coming from Windows a list of equivalent programs under Linux is a valuable aid See ChapterD on page The GNOME and KDE chapters have been revised See Chapter Blon page 47 and Chapter H on page 69 The help chapter has been revised It contains more information about man and info pages guides books and other resources See Chapter b on page P9 The former chapters of KMail and KOrganizer have been transferred to the new Kontact chapter See Chapter 8 on page Konqueror has been enhanced with information about tabbed browsing and other small improvements See Chapter 10 on page There is a new Firefox chapter See Chapter 11 on page The chapter about digital cameras has been updated and expanded It con tains more information about Digikam See Chapter 16 on page Typographical Conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this book m etc passwd files or directories placeholder replace the character string placeholder including the angle brackets with the actual value PATH an environment variable 1s commands m user users Alf a key to press a File menu items buttons or other elements from a graphical user interface Acknowledgements With a lot of personal commitment the Linux developers continue to promote the development of Linux We would like to express our sincere gratitude for their ef
285. so when you click the Search tab or enter a search string and click Search In the dialog window for generating the search index shown in Figure 5 3 on page 104 use the check boxes to determine the information sources to index The index is generated when you exit the dialog with Build Index To limit the search base and the hit list as precisely as possible use the three drop down menus to determine the number of displayed hits and the selection area of sources to search The following options are available for determining the selection area Default A predefined selection of sources is searched All All sources are searched None No sources selected for the search SUSE LINUX uoiojueuunooc pub dle H 101 102 E gt Contents Search Glossary Method and e Max results 5 X Scope selection Custom e Linux Documentation O Manpages Build Search Index Figure 5 2 Configuring the Search Function Custom Determine the sources to search by activating the respective check boxes in the overview When you have completed the search configuration click Search The relevant items are then displayed in the view window and can easily be navigated with mouse clicks 5 2 Man Pages Man pages are an essential part of any Linux system They explain the usage of a command and all available options and parameters Man pages are sorted in categories as shown in Table 1 on this pag
286. sound effects such as an equalizer the stereo balance and a hall effect Select the desired effects and adjust the settings if available for each of them SUSE LINUX ________ 185 186 Visualizations amaroK comes with a number of visualizations that display a graphical effect for the music played Native amaroK visualizations are displayed in the player window Cycle through the various available display modes by clicking the ani mation In addition to the above amaroK also supports the visualization plug ins of the XMMS media player To use these first install the xmms plugins package then select Visualizations from the amaroK menu This opens a window listing the available plug ins XMMS plug ins are always displayed in an extra window In some cases there is an option to display them in fullscreen mode For some plug ins you may not get a smooth visual effect unless you use a 3D accelerated graphics card 13 2 2 XMMS XMMS is another full featured media player with robust audio support so that pops or breaks during playback should be very rare The application is easy to use The button for displaying the menu is located in the upper left corner of the program window For those preferring a GNOME like look and feel there is a GTK2 version of XMMS available the Beep Media Player Just install the package bmp However not all XMMS plug ins are supported by this port of XMMS Select the output plug in module with O
287. ss a feedback channel for problems and wishes It also provides information about the version authors and license of Kooka and KDE 17 4 The Gallery The gallery window shows the default folder where Kooka stores all its image files An example is shown in Figure 7 Zon the following page To save an im age to your personal home directory click the thumbnail to select it then select File gt Save Image Then enter your personal home directory and give the file a descriptive name To add images to the gallery simply drag and drop them from Konqueror Start Konqueror navigate to the directory containing the images to add to the gallery and drag them with the mouse to a folder of the Kooka gallery SUSE LINUX uouooigddy Guiuup2gs v 0 00y 231 Image Name Size Format Kooka Gallery 4 items Ba kscan 0001 png 317 x 441 PNG Ad 317 x 442 PNG Ba kscan 0003 png 320 x 444 PNG a kscan_0004 png 352 x 422 PNG Figure 17 4 The Kooka Gallery 17 5 Optical Character Recognition If the character recognition module is installed documents can be scanned in lineart mode saved in the proposed format then processed for text recogni tion from the Image menu Process the entire document or only a previously selected area A configuration dialog tells the module whether the original text is in printed type handwriting or standardized type Also set the language so the module can process the document correctl
288. stScript Viewer 4 Add E a Help X Close emove D Figure 3 3 Editing the MIME Type 3 3 4 Configuring Nautilus Nautilus retrieves its default font and other preferences from the desktop config uration To set Nautilus specific preferences select Edit gt Preferences in any Nautilus window The configuration dialog offers five tabs Views Behavior Display List Columns and Preview Views allows switching the Default View between Icon View and List View A sorting order can be set for any of these options In Behavior choose between single click and double click response and also set the handling of executable files These can either be started on activation or have the content displayed The operating mode of the trash is also set here Activate a confimation dialog before deletion if desired Include a Delete command that 3 3 File Management with Nautilus bypasses trash can also be set The files are immediately deleted if this option is activated Display features three options for determining what information should be dis played for icons and how it should be displayed In addition to that the data for mat can also be set here List Columns determines what information should be revealed in the list view In Preview select whether to activate preview thumb nails for certain file types 3 4 Important Utilities
289. start watching the broadcast Tip Editing the Station List Using keyboard shortcuts control the channel selection using your keyboard To set a shortcut for any station contained in your station list select the station click Edit Edit Station A dialog called TV Station Properties opens Enter the shortcut and leave the dialog with OK This dialog also allows you to define submenus holding groups of stations such as news or private Tip The xawtv4 software package contains several more useful stand alone multime dia applications pia4 A lean command line controlled movie player that can be used to play any movie streams recorded by xawtv4 mtt4 A video text browser see Figure on the facing page alexplore A stand alone DVB channel scanner application Its functionality is integrated into xawtv4 dvbradio A DVB radio player Use it to listen to DVB S radio streams after you have completed the initial station scan see Figure on page 206 dvbrowse An EPG browser application Use it to get EPG information after you have completed the initial station scan 204 145 Watching Digital Video Broadcasts with xawtv4 F teletext ARD 3 ipe E es File Edit Goto Region Subpage Station Font Help ZS e A index prev next close 719 Mo 17 01 05 15 32 11 Fa Der Videotext l im Ersten US Reporter USA spahen Iran aus Mehr als 175 000 Tsunami Opfer Reform des EU St
290. store dump examines files in a file system determines which ones need to be backed up and copies those files to a specified disk tape or other storage medium The restore command performs the inverse function of dump it can restore a full backup of a file system Find more information at http dump sourceforge net 2 5 System and File Management 2 6 Software Development This section introduces Linux IDEs toolkits and versioning systems for profes sional software development Table 2 6 Development Software for Windows and Linux Task Windows Application Linux Application Integrated Borland C Delphi Visu KDevelop Eclipse Mono Development alStudio NET Environments Toolkits MIC Ot GTK Ot GTK Versioning Clearcase Perforce Source CVS Subversion Systems Safe KDevelop KDevelop allows you to write programs for different languages C C Python Perl etc It includes a documentation browser a source code editor with syntax highlighting a GUI for the compiler and much more Find more information at http www kdevelop org Eclipse The Eclipse Platform is designed for building integrated development environments that can be extended with custom plug ins The base distri bution also contains a full featured Java development environment Find more information at http www eclipse org Qt Qtisa program library for developing applications with graphical user interfaces It allows you to develop profess
291. strategy specify what to look for the exact word parts of the word or the prefix or suffix Under Help access the online manual of the application with Contents and information about the author and version of the application with About SUSE LINUX oi 62 Dictionary Edit View Help Word GNOME v EN Look Up Word Y Webster s Revised Unabridged Dictionary 1913 Gnome Gnome n F gnome prob fr Gr gnw mon one that knows a guardian i e of the treasures in the inner parts of the earth or fr intelligence both fr gnw nai gignw skein to know See Know 1 An imaginary being supposed by the Rosicrucians to inhabit the inner parts of the earth and to be the guardian of mines quarries etc 2 A dwarf a goblin a person of small stature or misshapt features or of strange appearance Lookup done Figure 3 4 GNOME Dictionary 3 4 3 Messaging with Gaim Gaim command gaim is a powerful instant messenger client It supports vari ous protocols such as AIM ICQ GroupWise IRC Jabber MSN and others Its most popular features include the ability to log in to multiple accounts on mul tiple instant messaging networks at the same time automatic text replacement and spell checking Gaim has buddy pounces known as buddy alerts in AOL Messenger meaning that you can configure Gaim to notify you whenever one of your buddies enters or leaves a channel to which you are current
292. symbol with a white X If you click this icon the contents of the line are deleted allowing entry of a new location Valid locations can be path specifications like the one that appears when the home di rectory is displayed or Web page URLs After entering an address press Enter or click Go to the right of the input line Access directories or Web pages visited recently via the black arrow to the right of the location bar This function saves some typing if you need to access certain contents repeatedly If there are loca tions that you need to view again and again it is more convenient to create book marks for them 4 3 6 The Main Window The main window displays the content of the selected directory If you click an icon the respective file is displayed in Konqueror or loaded into the appropriate application for further processing Clicking an RPM package lists the contents of the file Selecting Install package with YaST prompts for the root password entry after which the package is installed If you right click an icon a menu opens The kind of menu displayed depends on the file type and offers common actions such as Cut Copy Paste and 4 3 Konqueror as a File Manager Delete Use Open with to select the application with which to open the file from a list of suitable programs The quickest way to perform many actions is the drag and drop method For example easily move files from one Ko
293. t Add the attendees in Invitations or SUSE LINUX WUDIBOld Jopue o2 puo ID JA 3 UY uounjo 3 M 125 126 File Edit View Actions Tools Search Help En a 8 2 gt SD O Send Receive Print Previous Today Next Go To Day 7 C Thursday 03 Mar 2005 Category is Any Category Clear On This Computer Thursday 03 March March 2005 M T w T F s s On The Web 1 2 MN a 5 6 Contacts CG 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ii am a 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Birthdays amp Annive id KR 9 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Weather 28 29 30 31 10 Read the manual am eO Summary 11 S a a 12 pm fLunch with Geeko D O Read manual O Complete screenshots e Mm 1 C Mail 2 3 Contacts 3 pm El Calendars 4 pm Tasks B5 pm fei Exchange ga gt Figure 7 3 The Evolution Calendar Scheduling To enter attendees from your address book use Contacts to open a dialog in which to select them Scheduling can also be used to schedule a time that fits all attendees Press Autopick after configuring participants to find a time 7 5 3 Adding Calendars GroupWise and Exchange calendars should be configured in the account config uration To add additional local or Web calendars select File New Calen dar Select the desired type and enter the required information 7 6 Syncing Data with a Handheld Evolution is designed so its data can be synced with handheld devices such as a Palm The synchro
294. t rewrit ing CDs and the integrated audio player A detailed description of all available program features is available at http k3b sourceforge net SUSE LINUX uo poda y Buluing Jqy eul aey C 213 214 CD Reader Device HL DT ST DVD ROM GDR8082N ly Burning Device D Speed y O Options Advanced Writing Mode Auto Copy Mode Normal Copy Clone Copy Options C Simulate Burnfree C On the fly C Only create image X Remove image Copies CE a Temp Directory Write image file to Jtmp kde tux ra Free space in temporary directory 6 0 GB K3b Defaults User Defaults Save User Defaults Figure 15 3 Copying a CD 15 5 For More Information Digital Cameras and Linux Managing photos from your camera can be fun if you have the right tools Linux offers several handy utilities to sort and organize your photographs This chapter covers the use of gphoto gtkam Konqueror and Digikam 16 1 Connecting tothe Camera 216 162 Accessing the Camera o 216 163 Installing the Programs 217 164 UsingKonquero 217 165 UsinmggtKad o ooo o eee 218 16 6 Using DigikaM o o 219 16 7 For More Information 224 xnur pub spJeuJp2 Jos A comprehens
295. t a new name organization e mail address SMTP server or password The Privacy module manages personal Web browsing data For example use it to clear the cache delete the history of visited Web sites or remove unwanted cookies 4 2 10 Sound amp Multimedia Here perform all settings for the playback of audio CDs and for the sound sys tem Under System Bell switch from system notification to a system bell and specify the volume pitch and duration of the bell By default system notifications are used Use this module to determine how the system should inform you in the event of a problem when a task is performed or if an event requiring your immediate attention occurs In the upper part of the dialog select the application for which to configure the system notifications As soon as you select a program all events the application can send to the user are listed in the lower window Determine the notification type for each notification in the Actions dialog The default view of the system notification dialog only offers Play a sound for audible notification Click More Options to access other action modes You can log the notification to a file execute a program or show the message in a pop up window In the lower part of the dialog under Quick Controls globally activate or deactivate the actions for all programs 4 2 11 System Administration If you want to install new fonts the Font Installer
296. t set for the user permission By means of the setuid bit all users starting the passwd command execute it as root 19 2 4 The setgid Bit The setuid attribute applies to users However there is also an equivalent prop erty for groups the setgid attribute A program for which this attribute was set runs under the group ID under which it was saved no matter which user starts it Therefore in a directory with the setgid bit all newly created files and subdi rectories are assigned to the group to which the directory belongs Consider the following example directory drwXxrws 2 tux archive 48 Nov 19 17 12 backup 19 2 Users and Access Permissions You can see the s bit set for the group permission The owner of the directory and members of the group archive may access this directory Users that are not members of this group are mapped to the respective group The effective group ID of all written files will be archive For example a backup program that runs with the group ID archive is able to access this directory even without root privileges 19 2 5 The Sticky Bit There is also the sticky bit It makes a difference whether it belongs to an exe cutable program or a directory If it belongs to a program a file marked in this way is loaded to RAM to avoid needing to get it from the hard disk each time it is used This attribute is used rarely because modern hard disks are fast enough If this attribute is assigned to a dire
297. tall theme New themes can simply be dragged and dropped into the Theme Preferences win dow 3 2 8 Accessibility The settings of this module facilitate the use of the keyboard for users with mo tion impairments The module consists of the three tabs Basic Filters and Mouse Keys Before modifying settings activate Enable keyboard accessibility features Features The keyboard accessibility functions can be deactivated automatically after a certain time Set an appropriate time limit measured in seconds with the slider The system can additionally provide audible feedback when the keyboard accessibility functions are activated and deactivated 3 2 Settings Enable Sticky Keys Some keyboard shortcuts require that one key is kept pressed constantly this applies to Alf Ctrl or Ghiff while the rest of the shortcut is typed When sticky keys are used the system regards those keys as pressed after being hit once For an audible feedback generated each time a modifier key Ctr or Alf is pressed activate Beep when modifier is pressed If Disable if two keys pressed together is selected the keys do not stick anymore once two keys are pressed simultaneously The system then assumes that the keyboard shortcut has been completely entered Enable Repeat Keys Activate Repeat Keys to make settings with sliders for Delay and Speed This determines how long a key must be pressed for the
298. target file is overwritten rm option s file s Removes the specified files from the file system Directories are not removed by rm unless the option r is used r Deletes any existing subdirectories i Waits for confirmation before deleting each file SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM 8uptoM 261 262 ln option s source target Creates an internal link from source to target Normally such a link points directly to source on the same file system However if 1n is executed with the s option it creates a symbolic link that only points to the directory in which source is located enabling linking across file systems s Creates a symbolic link cd options s directory Changes the current directory cd without any parameters changes to the user s home directory mkdir option s directoryname Creates a new directory rmdir option s directoryname Deletes the specified directory if it is already empty chown option s username group file s Transfers ownership of a file to the user with the specified username R Changes files and directories in all subdirectories chgrp option s groupname file s Transfers the group ownership of a given file to the group with the spec ified group name The file owner can only change group ownership if a member of both the current and the new group chmod options mode file s Changes the access permissions The mode parameter has three parts group access and
299. te to the other StarOffice StarOffice is a proprietary version of OpenOffice org and is dis tributed by Sun Microsystems It is available on multiple platforms includ ing Windows and Solaris It includes certain advanced features not avail able with the free version OpenOffice org Find more information about StarOffice at http www sun com software star staroffice Gnuplot Gnuplot is a very powerful and portable command line controlled data plotting software It is also available for MacOS and Windows plat forms Plots created by Gnuplot can be exported to various formats such as PostScript PDF SVG and others allowing you to process these plots easily Find more information about Gnuplot at http www gnuplot info index html Rekall Rekallis a tool to manipulate databases Supported databases include MySQL PostgreSOL XBase with XBSOL IBM DB2 and ODBC Use Rekall to generate different sorts of reports and forms design database queries or import and export data to various formats Find more information about Rekall at http www thekompany com products rekall knoda knoda is a database front end to various different types of databases It supports connections to MySQL PostreSQL SQLite and ODBC database servers knoda can be used for manipulating data in tables creating and storing queries and importing and exporting data in CSV format Find more information about knoda at http www knoda org SUSE LINUX SIOMI
300. ter a successful installation you can enable the new theme 1 Click Tools Theme 11 5 Customizing Firefox 2 A new dialog appears Click Get More Themes If you already installed a theme find it in the list as in Figure on this page lt Plastikfox Crystal SVG 1 5 V ctor Fern ndez Mart nez XOJ9JIJ Firefox default 2 0 Gerich and Horlander Archivo Editar Ver Ir Marcadores QO O A E mw Ayuda de Mozilla Firebird Forc 4 ni 41 Uninstall Use Theme Get More Themes Figure 11 4 Installing Firefox Themes 3 A new window appears with the Web site https update mozilla org 4 Choose a theme and click Install Now 5 Confirm the download and installation 6 After downloading the theme a dialog appears and informs you about your list of themes Activate the new theme with Use Theme 7 Close the window and restart Firefox If a theme is installed you can always switch to a different theme without restart ing by clicking Tools gt Themes then Use Theme If you do not use a theme anymore you can delete it in the same dialog with Uninstall 11 5 3 Adding Smart Keywords to Your Online Searches Searching the Internet is one of the main tasks a browser can perform for you Firefox lets you define your own smart keywords abbreviations to use as a com mand for searching the Web For example if you use Wikipedia often use a sm
301. test directory has been created with the same contents as your test directory in your home directory 19 1 9 mtools mtools are a set of commands for working with MS DOS file systems The com mands included in mt oo ls allow you to address the first floppy drive as a just like under MS DOS and the commands are like MS DOS commands except they are prefixed with an m mdir a displays the contents of the floppy disk in drive a mcopy Testfile a copies the file Test file to the floppy disk mdel a Testfile deletes Testfileina mformat a formats the floppy disk in MS DOS format using the fdformat command mcd a makes a your current directory mmd a test creates the subdirectory test on the floppy disk mrd a test deletes the subdirectory test from the floppy disk 19 1 10 Cleaning Up After this crash course you should be familiar with the basics of the Linux shell or command line You may want to clean up your home directory by deleting the various test files and directories using the rm and rmdir commands At the end of this chapter find a list of the most important commands and a brief descrip tion of their functions 19 1 Introduction to Bash 19 2 Users and Access Permissions Since its inception in the early 1990s Linux has been developed as a multiuser system Any number of users can work on it simultaneously Users need to log in to the system before starting a session at their workstations Each user has a user name
302. the KGpg symbol in the panel and dropping it there Then select whether the file should be decrypted and saved or displayed in the editor 12 5 Text and File Encryption 12 5 3 The KGpg Editor Instead of creating contents for encryption in an external editor then encrypting the file with one of the methods described above you can use the integrated ed itor of KGpg to create the file Open the editor Open Editor from the context menu enter the desired text and click Encrypt Then select the key to use and complete the encryption procedure To decrypt files use Decrypt and enter the password associated with the key Generating and checking signatures is just as easy as encrypting directly from the editor Go to Signature gt Generate Signature and select the file to sign from the file dialog Then designate the private key to use and enter the associated password KGpg informs about the successful generation of the signature Files can also be signed from the editor by simply clicking Sign Verify To check a signed file go to Signature Verify Signature and select the file to check in the following dialog After you confirm the selection KGpg checks the signature and reports the result of the operation Another possibility is to load the signed file into the editor and click Sign Verify 12 6 For More Information For theoretical background information about the encryption method re
303. the browser from which to import settings After you click Next your settings are imported Find your imported bookmarks in a newly created folder beginning with From 11 4 Using the Download Manager With the help of the download manager keep track of your current and past downloads To open the download manager click Tools gt Downloads Firefox 11 3 Managing Bookmarks File Edit View We C9 E lO 2 New Bookmark New Folder New Separator Move Properties Rename XOJ9JIy Search El L Bookmarks Location Description ES Bookmar o epi Name Bookmarks Too N NOVELL World http www novell com N NOVELL Novel http www novell com N NOVELL Support http support novell co Welcome to S http www suse com u 8 object s Figure 11 2 Using the Firefox Bookmark Manager opens a window with your downloads While downloading a file see a progress bar and the current file Pause the download and resume it later if necessary To open a downloaded file click Open With Remove erase it from the medium If you need information about the file right click the filename and choose Proper ties If you need further control of the Download Manager open the configuration window from Edit gt Preferences and go to the Downloads tab Here deter mine the download folder how the manager behaves and some
304. the file system To prevent data loss run this command before taking a removable data medium from its drive Normally only root is al lowed to run the commands mount and umount To enable other users to run these commands edit the etc fstab file to specify the option user for the respective drive 19 3 2 System Commands The following section lists a few of the most important commands needed for retrieving system information and process and network control SUSE LINUX IOUS eut UM 8uptoM 265 266 System Information df option s directory The df disk free command when used without any options displays information about the total disk space the disk space currently in use and the free space on all the mounted drives If a directory is specified the information is limited to the drive on which that directory is located h Shows the number of occupied blocks in gigabytes megabytes or kilobytes in human readable format T Type offile system ext2 nfs etc du option s path This command when executed without any param eters shows the total disk space occupied by files and subdirectories in the current directory a Displays the size of each individual file h Output in human readable form s Displays only the calculated total size free option s The command free displays information about RAM and swap space usage showing the total and the used amount in both cate gories b Output in bytes
305. tion nor the resulting application are cov ered by the installation support Do I need to compile a kernel myself No it is usually unnecessary and strongly discouraged for inexperienced users to recompile the kernel Do so only at your own risk In cases of custom compiled kernels SUSE cannot provide any installation support How can I defragment my hard disk Linux file systems prevent fragmentation However make sure that you do not use more than 80 of each partition The fuller your hard disk the more fragmentation you get even under Linux Use df h to view information about used and available hard disk space I need more space for Linux How can I add another hard disk To make more space available integrate a new hard disk or parts of it par titions into your Linux system at any time For example if it turns out that you need more space in opt mount an additional hard disk partition to this directory To do so follow this procedure 1 Install your hard disk following the instructions of the manufacturer then start Linux Log in as the root user Partition the new hard disk with fdisk For further information refer to the manual page of fdisk with man fdisk Format the partition with mke2fs dev hdbl Enter the following commands cd opt mkdir opt2 mount dev hdbl opt2 cp axv opt2 Check thoroughly to see whether all the data has been copied After wards move the old directory and
306. ture to highlight important mes sages that you do not want to forget Display only messages with a certain status using Status in the search bar 8 2 2 Contacts The upper left frame of this component shows all addresses in the currently acti vated address books The lower left frame lists your address books and shows the SUSE LINUX uJDJ80Jg Jopue o2 puo IDJA 3 UY ODC 131 132 activation status for each The right frame shows the currently selected contact Use the search bar at the top to find a particular contact 8 2 3 To Do List To do List shows your list of tasks Click the field at the top to add a new item to the list Right click in a column of an existing item to make changes to the value in that column An item can be broken into several subitems Right click and se lect New Sub to do to create a subitem 8 2 4 Calendar The calendar view is divided into a number of frames By default view a small calendar of this month and a week view of the current week Also find a list of to dos a detailed view of the current event or to do and a list of calendars with the status of each Select a different view from the toolbar or the View menu 8 2 5 Notes Use this component to keep notes to yourself If you are using KDE use the KNote icon in the panel to make them visible on the desktop 8 3 Mail Kontact uses KMail as its e mail component To configure it open the mail com ponent then s
307. types of files For example one of your directo ries may hold graphics files of different formats but you only want to see those in PNG format You could then use this submenu item to hide all files that are not in PNG format Selecting Create Image Gallery causes Konqueror to search the directory for any image files The program then creates thumbnail pictures of them and combines these into an HTML page A dialog box prompts you to set the options for the HTML page such as the font and the number of thumb nails per line Settings Use the Settings menu to configure the look and feel of Konqueror If you do not want a menu select Hide Menubar Press to display it again The Toolbars submenu allows you to hide or display other elements of the file manager View profiles can be used to change the view according to predefined us age patterns To switch between the available profiles select Load View Profile One of the profiles is the Web browser profile which is used auto matically when you click the Konqueror icon in the panel Add your own profiles by selecting Configure View Profiles In addition you can specify individual keyboard shortcuts with Configure Shortcuts customize the toolbar with Configure Toolbars and configure global settings for the file manager with Configure Konqueror Window The Window menu allows you to split the main window horizon tally and vertically
308. udio and video formats including Ogg Vorbis WMV MOV and AVI Import and edit playlists of various types create screenshots and save me dia streams to your local hard disk Find more information about Kaffeine athttp kaffeine sourceforge net amaroK The amaroK media player handles various audio formats and plays the streaming audio broadcasts of radio stations on the Internet The pro gram handles all file types supported by the sound server acting as a back end currently aRts or GStreamer Find more information about amaroK at http amarok kde org or refer to Section 13 2 1 on page 182 XMMS XMMS is the traditional choice for multimedia playback It is focused on music playback offering support for CD playback and Ogg Vorbis files Users of Winamp should find XMMS comfortable because of its similarity Find more information about XMMS at http www xmms org or refer to Section 13 2 2 on page Audacity Audacity is a powerful free sound editing tool Record edit and play any Ogg Vorbis or WAV file Mix tracks at your whim and apply effects to them and export the results to WAV or Ogg Vorbis Find more information about Audacity at http audacity sourceforge net or refer to Section 13 4 on page 192 Noteedit Noteedit is a powerful score editor for Linux Use it to create sheets of notes and to export and import scores to and from many formats such as MIDI MusicXML and LilyPond Find more information about Noteedit at
309. uit without changing any of the defaults After the data has been synchronized for the first time configure the details what to do in case of conflicts the way in which backup databases are saved and how certain fields as stored on the handheld should be assigned to the fields expected by KAddressBook 9 3 Configuring the KAddressBook Conduit 9 4 Managing To Do Items and Events On the KDE desktop to dos tasks and events appointments are managed with KOrganizer Start the application from the main menu with the command korganizer or as part of Kontact After enabling the calendar and the to do conduit of KPilot set some configuration options before using them ToDo File Conflict Resolution About Calendar file Browse Sync Action East sync if possible Always do a full sync may take some time Sync only Pilot items to PC next sync only Sync only PC items to Pilot next sync only IR Sync archived entries to the PC J X cance j Figure 9 2 KPilot Configuration KOrganizer stores its files in the directory kde share apps korganizer However given that the directory kde begins with a dot it may not be shown by the file selection dialog In this case enter the complete path manually or ex plicitly toggle the display of hidden files dot files in the file selection dialog The default shortcut for this is F8 After opening the directory kde sh
310. ups may be available on your news server Interesting newsgroups for Linux users are comp os linux apps comp os linux questions and comp os linux hardware If you cannot find a spe cific newsgroup go to http www linux org docs usenetlinux html Follow the general Usenet rules available online at http www f aqs org faqs usenet posting rules partl 5 7 Usenet Part Il Office The OpenOffice org Office Suite OpenOffice org is a powerful office suite that offers tools for all types of office tasks such as writing texts working with spreadsheets or creating graphics and presentations With OpenOffice org use the same data across different comput ing platforms You can also open and edit files in Microsoft Office formats then save them back to this format if needed This chapter only covers the basic skills needed to get started with OpenOffice org Start the application from the SUSE menu or using the command oof fice 6 1 Compatibility with Other Office Applications 110 6 2 Word Processing with Writer 111 63 Introducing Cald ooo 115 6 4 Introducing Impress lees 115 65 Introducing Base eee 115 6 66 ForMorelnformation 115 ene eoyo 810 eoyouedo eu 110 OpenOffice org consists of several application modules subprograms which are designed to interact with each other They are listed in Table 6 1 on the current page The discussion in
311. uration menu The YaST configuration dialog can be started via Settings gt Configure with YaST After entering the root password YaST starts Depending on the access type start the modem ISDN network or DSL configuration of YaST If you are using an ISDN connection and you have selected Channel Bundling in YaST a second ISDN channel can be added to an existing connection with Add link This doubles the transfer rate although at a higher price Activate channel bundling if you need to download large files The activated channel bundling is evident from the red plus symbol at the top left corner of the KIn ternet icon If your computer has more than one network device and you have configured all of them with YaST you can use the KInternet option Interface to switch between these interfaces You must have selected User Controlled device activation in the appropriate YaST network dialog to do this If you have multiple providers as well choose them using the Provider switch of KInternet Providers are also set in YaST Users who want to establish Internet connections automatically can use dial on demand DoD If this mode is selected KInternet automatically connects to your Internet service provider ISP as soon as a request is submitted After a certain time out the connection is terminated A DoD connection is evident from the blue D at the bottom right corner of the KInternet icon SUSE LINUX 25
312. ures from Your Camera After your camera has been configured correctly connect to your camera with the Camera menu and the name that you gave in the dialog from Section 16 6 1 on the preceding page Digikam opens a window and begins to download thumb nails and displays them as in Figure 16 2 on the current page Right click an im age to open a pop up menu with the options to View display some Properties and EXIF Information Download or Delete the image With Advanced select renaming options and how the camera provided information EXIF should be handled Canon PowerShot S40 IMG 3982 JPG IMG 3983 JPG IMG 3984 JPG IMG 3985 JPG Ready LI Advanced gt gt Help v Select v Download v Delete Close Figure 16 2 Downloading Pictures from Camera The renaming options can be very convenient if your camera does not use mean ingful filenames You can let Digikam rename your photographs automatically Give a unique prefix and optionally give a date time or sequence number The rest is done by Digikam Select all photographs to download from the camera by pressing the left mouse button or clicking individual photographs with Ctrl pressed Selected pho tographs appear with inverted colors Click Download Select the destination from the list or by creating a new album with New Album This automatically suggests a filename with the current date Confirm with Ok to st
313. urposes also add v to follow the progress of the archiving although this option is not mandatory After using cd to change to your home directory where the test di rectory is located enter tar cvf testarchive tar test After that view the contents of the archive file with tar tf testarchive tar Thetest directory with all its files and directories has remained unchanged on your hard disk To unpack the archive enter tar xvf testarchive tar but do not try this yet For file compression the obvious choice on Linux is the popular gzip pro gram Just enter gzip testarchive tar With 1s now see that the file testarchive tar is no longer there and that the file testarchive tar gz has been created instead This file is much smaller and therefore much better suited for transfer via e mail or storage on a floppy Now unpack this file in the test 2 directory created earlier To do so en ter cp testarchive tar gz test2 to copy the file to that directory SUSE LINUX ________ 253 254 Change to the directory with cd test2 A compressed archive with the tar gz extension can be unzipped with the gunzip command Enter gunzip testarchive tar gz which results in the file testarchive tar which then needs to be extracted or untarred with Car xvf testarchive tar You can also unzip and extract a compressed archive in one step by adding the z op tion The complete command would be tar xzvf testarchive tar gz With 1s you can see that a new
314. ut of commands in a convenient way To see how this works read Section 19 1 7 on the current page 19 1 7 Pipes Normally the standard output in the shell is your screen or the console window and the standard input is the keyboard To forward the output of a command to an application like less use a pipeline To view the files in the test directory enter the command 1s test less The contents of the test directory are then displayed with less This only makes sense if the normal output with 1s would be too lengthy For instance if you view the contents of the dev directory with 1s dev you only see a small por tion in the window View the entire list with ls dev less Itis also possible to save the output of commands to a file For example 1s test Content generates a new file called Content that contains a list of the files and directories in test View the file with less Content You can also use a file as the input for a command For example sort the text lines in Test ile with sort lt Testfile The output of the command sort is sent to the screen The text is sorted by the first letters of the individual lines If you need a new file containing the sorted list pipe the output of the command sort to a file To test this create an unsorted name list in an editor and save it under list in the test directory Then change into test and enter the com mand sort unsortedlist gt sortedlist Finally view the sorted list w
315. v must be entered in the xawtv file The entries should look like this launch Gamix Ctrl G gamix AleVT Ctrl A alevt The shortcut then the command used to start the application should follow the application name itself Start the applications entered under launch via the Tool menu 14 2 Video Text Support Use alevt to browse video text pages Start the application with Multimedia Video alevt or at the command line with alevt The application saves all the pages of the selected station just activated with motv Browse pages by entering the desired page number or by clicking a page number Move forward or backward through the pages by clicking el or lo cated in the lower window margin Recent versions of motv and its successor xawtv4 include their own video text viewer applications mtt motv and mtt4 xawtv4 mtt4 even supports DVB cards 200 14 2 Video Text Support 14 3 Webcams and motv If your webcam is already supported by Linux access it with motv Find a sum mary of the supported USB devices at http www linux usb org lf you have already used motv to access the TV card prior to accessing the webcam the bttv driver is loaded The webcam driver is loaded automatically when your we bcam is connected to the USB Start motv at the command line with the parame ter c dev videol to access the webcam Access the TV card with motv c dev videoO When connecting the web
316. w the saved Web archive later simply click the respective file and the Web page is displayed in Konqueror along with its images 10 3 Internet Keywords Searching the Web using Konqueror is very easy Konqueror defines over 70 search filters for you all with a specific shortcut To search for a certain topic on the Internet enter the shortcut and the keyword separated by a colon The rele vant page containing the search results is then displayed SUSE LINUX JojJenbuo JOSMOIG Oe eu 153 154 To see the already definied shortcuts go to Settings gt Configure Konqueror In the dialog box that appears select Web Shortcuts Now you can see the names of the search providers and the shortcuts Konqueror definies lots of search filters the classical search engines like Google Yahoo and Lycos and a number of filters for less common purposes like an acronym database the Internet movie database or KDE application searches If you do not find your preferred search engine here easily define a new one For example to search our support database for some interesting articles normally goto http portal suse com find the search page and enter your query This can be simplified by using shortcuts In the above dialog box select New and give your shortcut a name in Search provider name Enter your abbrevia tions in URI shortcuts There can more than one separated by commas The im portant text fi
317. witch To change back into your original session use Ctrl AIPAF7 E Important Switching Displays Your original session is started on the graphical console that can be reached with CH AIF Additional sessions are started on the higher consoles reachable via F8 and higher Important 2I Switching Users in KDE Open an additional session in KDE via the main menu Select Switch User and determine whether your original session should be locked while you switch to another user account KDM appears requesting username and password for the new account Enter the requested data and a new KDE session starts To switch back to your original session click Switch User again Select the session to which to switch Another way to start a new session is to lock your current session via Lock Ses sion then click Switch User in the unlock dialog This goes to the KDM login screen where username and password for the new session can be entered 1 3 Desktop 1 4 File Management A central part of your desktop environment is a file manager application en abling you easily to create access and manage all files on your system Tradi tional file management in Linux would have been done via the command line requiring some deeper knowledge of several commands to list create delete or edit files and their properties A file manager provides a graphical and more in tuitive way to handle these tasks Learn more about the
318. write access w to it but cannot execute it x The members of the group project3 can read the file but they cannot modify it or execute it Other users do not have any access to this file Other permissions can be assigned by means of ACLs access control lists See Section on pageD59 for details and refer to the chapter in the Administration Guide for further back ground information Directory Permissions Access permissions for directories have the type d For directories the individual permissions have a slightly different meaning Example 19 2 Sample Output Showing Directory Permissions drwxrwxr x 1 tux project3 35 Jun 21 15 15 ProjectData In Example 19 2Jon this page the owner tux and the owning group project3 of the directory ProjectData are easy to recognize In con trast to the file access permissions from on the page before the set reading permission r means that the contents of the directory can be shown The write permission w means new files can be created The executable permis sion x means the user can change to this directory In the above example this means the user tux as well as the members of the group pro ject3 can 256 19 2 Users and Access Permissions change to the ProjectData directory x view the contents r and add or delete files w The rest of the users on the other hand are given less ac cess They may enter the directory x and browse through it r but not insert any
319. ws is determined in Group similar tasks You can define some actions to perform if the left middle or right mouse button is pressed With Window Behavior customize the default KDE window manager KWin This controls what happens windows are moved clicked or resized Windows Specific Settings let you customize settings that only apply for some windows It only takes effect if you use KWin as your window manager doptseq Jay eut 4 2 4 Internet amp Network The modules Paried Bluetooth Devices and Bluetooth Services deal with how you manage your Bluetooth devices and services KDE lets you change the time out values for different connections in Connection Preferences Desktop Sharing is useful if you want to invite other people to your desktops Only let trustworthy users take part in your session File Sharing can only be changed if you are an administrator If you are root you can add change or remove folders intended to be shared with others Use Local Network Browsing if you want to browse a local network It is like Network Neighborhood Take into account that you need some additional soft ware especially the LISa daemon see package kdenetwork3 1isa In Proxy customize proxy and SOCKS servers Normally if your administrator does not tell you to use this it is probably not useful for you The Samba submodule should only be customized with the YaST configur
320. y See Figure 17 5 on the next page Switch to the OCR Result Text window and check the text which may need to be proofread To do this save the text with File Save OCR Result Text The text can then be processed with OpenOffice org or KWrite 232 17 5 Optical Character Recognition OCR Image Spell checking Starting Optical Character Recognition with ocrad OCR ocrad is a Free Software project for optical character d recognition The author of ocrad is Antonio Diaz For more information about ocrad see http www gnu org software ocrad ocrad html Images should be scanned in black white mode for ocrad Best results are achieved if the characters are at least 20 pixels high Problems arise as usual with very bold or very light or broken characters the same with merged character groups uouooigddy Buluuoos v D 00X OCRAD layout analysis mode Column Detection Using ocrad binary usr bin ocrad Version 0 11 7 Startocr Close Figure 17 5 OCR with Kooka SUSE LINUX ______ 233 Manipulating Graphics with The GIMP The GIMP The GNU Image Manipulation Program is a program for creating and editing pixel graphics In most aspects its features are comparable to those of Adobe Photoshop and other commercial programs Use it to resize and retouch photographs design graphics for Web pages make covers for your custom CDs or almost any other graphi
321. yer and ripper see Figure 13 7 on the next page The CD player functionality is entirely controlled by the buttons in the bottom part of the window Control the ripping and encoding functionality using the tabs at the top of the window To view and edit the track and album information or to se lect the tracks to rip open the Tracks tab Select a track by clicking the check box next to the track title To edit the track information click Toggle disc editor and submit your modifications The Rip tab selects the preferred rip mode and con trols the ripping process Access the entire Grip configuration under the Config tab Use Status to check the status of the application SUSE LINUX 189 190 Pistas Extraer Configurar Status Ayuda Acerca de border la linea lila downs Pista Length Extraer 02 el feo 3 27 03 sale sobrando 3 43 Hi 04 corazoncito tirano 4 00 05 la ni a 3 07 06 hanal weech 3 01 07 medley pastures of plenty thi 5 57 El 08 la linea 5 01 09 el bracero fracasado 2 33 10 tr nsito 3 50 J 11 smoke acteal 4 52 B 2 Figure 13 7 Ripping Audio CDs with Grip Compressing Audio Data Using KAudioCreator KAudioCreator is a lean CD ripper application see Figure 13 8 on the facing page Once started it lists all the tracks of your CD in the CD Tracks tab Select the tracks to rip and encode To edit the track information use the Album Edi tor
322. ystem is run the power management can easily be adjusted in SUSE LINUX using GNOME Battery Charge Monitor or KDE KPowersave Battery Charge Monitor allows you to send your machine into a hibernation state Suspend Computer in which the entire system state is written to disk prior to shutdown Once reactivated this state is recovered Configure the power man agement settings via Power Management Settings The YaST Power Manage ment module is launched enabling you to configure all power management set tings centrally Using KPowersave you can start the YaST Power Management module and is sue both a suspend to disk or a suspend to RAM if configured accordingly with YaST You may change the CPU frequency policy meaning your system either lets the CPU frequency drop when the system is idle and adjusts it dynamically if more CPU power is needed set the CPU frequency policy to Dynamic per manently keeps a low CPU frequency to save power select Powersave or per manently keeps a high CPU frequency for maximum CPU performance select Performance If you change the active power management scheme Set Active 1 9 Networking and Mobility Scheme all components of your system are part of the powersaving effort A power management scheme includes settings for CPU frequency scaling throt tling hard disk control and for the cooling of the system To start this program in a GNOME environment enter kpowersave at t

Novell SUSE LINUX Professional 9.3

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents